Bclass

B-Class
Operator's Manual
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Symbols i Practical tips or further information that
Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol indicates an
Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X Several of these symbols in
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks succession indicate an instruction
of DOLBY Laboratories. with several steps.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are (Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find more information about a
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
topic.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
Prince.
an instruction that is continued on
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
the next page.
trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
multifunction display/COMAND
Harman International Industries. display.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005
Corporation. The FreeType Project
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights
XM radio Inc. reserved.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2465840000 É2465840000bËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27
Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety ................................................... 37
Opening and closing ........................... 67
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97
Climate control ................................. 117
Driving and parking .......................... 133
On-board computer and displays .... 185
Stowage and features ...................... 235
Maintenance and care ...................... 265
Breakdown assistance ..................... 279
Wheels and tires ............................... 297
Technical data ................................... 327

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 130

Setting the side air vents ............... 130
12 V socket Alarm system
see Sockets see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
A Setting the brightness (on-board
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) computer) ...................................... 197
Display message ............................ 201 Anti-lock braking system
Function/notes ................................ 59 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes .................... 59 Anti-theft alarm system
Warning lamp ................................. 225 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating cooling Ashtray ............................................... 249
with air dehumidification ................. 123 Assistance menu (on-board
Active Parking Assist computer) .......................................... 194
Canceling ....................................... 176 ASSYST PLUS
Detecting parking spaces .............. 173 Displaying a service message ........ 270
Display message ............................ 216 Hiding a service message .............. 270
Exiting a parking space .................. 175 Notes ............................................. 270
Function/notes ............................. 173 Resetting the service interval
Important safety notes .................. 172 display ........................................... 270
Parking .......................................... 174 Service message ............................ 270
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64 Special service requirements ......... 271
Adaptive Brake Assist ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/notes ................................ 61 Activating/deactivating ................... 65
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 62 Function ........................................... 65
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Switching off the alarm .................... 65
Display message ............................ 212 ATTENTION ASSIST
Function/notes ............................. 102 Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Switching on/off (on-board Display message ............................ 215
computer) ...................................... 197 Function/notes ............................. 180
Additional speedometer ................... 196 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 192
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 332 Audio system
Air bags see separate operating instructions
Deployment ..................................... 39 Authorized Centers
Front air bag (driver, front see Qualified specialist workshop
passenger) ....................................... 42 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Important safety notes .................... 41 see Qualified specialist workshop
Knee bag .......................................... 44 Authorized workshops
Safety guidelines ............................. 40 see Qualified specialist workshop
Side impact air bag .......................... 44 AUTO lights
Window curtain air bag .................... 45 Display message ............................ 211
Air-conditioning system see Lights
see Climate control Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Air vents stop function) .................................... 137
Important safety notes .................. 130 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Rear ............................................... 131 start/stop function) .......................... 137
Setting ........................................... 130 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 99

Index 5
Automatic transmission Blind Spot Assist

Automatic drive program ............... 144 Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Changing gear ............................... 143 Display message ............................ 216
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 140 Notes/function .............................. 181
Display message ............................ 220 Brake Assist
Drive program display .................... 141 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Driving tips .................................... 143 Brake fluid
Emergency running mode .............. 147 Display message ............................ 207
Engaging drive position .................. 142 Notes ............................................. 332
Engaging neutral ............................ 141 Brake lamps
Engaging reverse gear ................... 141 Adaptive ........................................... 62
Engaging the park position ............ 141 Changing bulbs .............................. 109
Holding the vehicle stationary on Display message ............................ 209
uphill gradients .............................. 143 Brakes
Kickdown ....................................... 143 ABS .................................................. 59
Manual drive program .................... 144 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61
Overview ........................................ 140 BAS .................................................. 59
Problem (malfunction) ................... 147 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 332
Program selector button ................ 143 Display message ............................ 201
Pulling away ................................... 136 Driving tips .................................... 154
Starting the engine ........................ 135 Important safety notes .................. 154
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 144 Maintenance .................................. 155
Transmission position display ........ 141 Parking brake ................................ 150
Transmission positions .................. 142 Warning lamp ................................. 225
Automatic transmission Breakdown
emergency mode ............................... 147 see Flat tire
see Towing away/tow-starting
B Bulbs
see Changing bulbs
Backup lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 109
Display message ............................ 211 C
Bag hook ............................................ 243 Calling up a malfunction
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59 see Display messages
Battery (SmartKey) Car
Checking .......................................... 70 see Vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 70 Care
Replacing ......................................... 70 Carpets .......................................... 277
Battery (vehicle) Car wash ........................................ 271
Charging ........................................ 288 Display ........................................... 275
Display message ............................ 213 Exhaust pipe .................................. 275
Important safety notes .................. 285 Exterior lights ................................ 274
Jump starting ................................. 289 Gear or selector lever .................... 276
Belt force limiter Interior ........................................... 275
Activation ......................................... 49 Matte finish ................................... 273
Function ........................................... 49 Notes ............................................. 271
Blinds Paint .............................................. 273
see Roller sunblind Plastic trim .................................... 276

6 Index
Power washer ................................ 272 Tail lamps ...................................... 109

Rear view camera .......................... 275 Turn signals (front) ......................... 108
Roof lining ...................................... 277 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 109
Seat belt ........................................ 277 Child-proof locks
Seat cover ..................................... 276 Important safety notes .................... 57
Sensors ......................................... 275 Rear doors ....................................... 58
Steering wheel ............................... 276 Children
Trim pieces .................................... 276 In the vehicle ................................... 50
Washing by hand ........................... 272 Restraint systems ............................ 50
Wheels ........................................... 273 Child seat
Windows ........................................ 274 Automatic recognition ..................... 53
Wiper blades .................................. 274 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Wooden trim .................................. 276 anchors ............................................ 54
Cargo compartment cover ............... 244 On the front-passenger seat ............ 52
Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 240 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 57
Important safety notes .................. 240 Top Tether ....................................... 55
Notes on use ................................. 242 Cigarette lighter ................................ 250
Cargo compartment floor Climate control
Height adjustment ......................... 246 Automatic climate control ............. 119
Important safety notes .................. 245 Automatic climate control (dual-
Opening/closing ............................ 246 zone) .............................................. 121
Stowage well (under) ..................... 245 Controlling automatically ............... 125
Cargo net Cooling with air dehumidification . . 123
Attaching ....................................... 245 Defrosting the windows ................. 127
Important safety information ......... 245 Defrosting the windshield .............. 127
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 243 Important safety notes .................. 118
Car wash (care) ................................. 271 Indicator lamp ................................ 125
Center console Maximum cooling .......................... 127
Lower section .................................. 33 Notes on using automatic climate
Upper section .................................. 32 control ................................... 120, 122
Central locking Overview of systems ...................... 118
Automatic locking (on-board Problems with cooling with air
computer) ...................................... 198 dehumidification ............................ 125
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68 Problem with the rear window
Changing bulbs defroster ........................................ 129
Brake lamps ................................... 109 Refrigerant ..................................... 334
Cornering light function ................. 108 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 335
High-beam headlamps ................... 107 Setting the air distribution ............. 126
Important safety notes .................. 104 Setting the airflow ......................... 126
License plate lighting ..................... 111 Setting the air vents ...................... 130
Low-beam headlamps .................... 107 Setting the temperature ................ 125
Overview of bulb types .................. 105 Switching air-recirculation mode
Parking lamps ................................ 108 on/off ............................................ 129
Rear fog lamp ................................ 109 Switching on/off ........................... 123
Removing/replacing the cover Switching residual heat on/off ...... 129
(front wheel arch) .......................... 106
Reversing lamps ............................ 109
Standing lamps (front) ................... 108

Index 7
Switching the rear window Cup holder

defroster on/off ............................ 128 Center console .............................. 248
Switching the ZONE function on/ Important safety notes .................. 247
off .................................................. 126 Rear compartment ......................... 248
Cockpit Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24
Overview .......................................... 28 Customer Relations Department ....... 24
see Instrument cluster
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST D
Display message ............................ 201
Dashboard
Operation/notes .............................. 60
COMAND see Instrument cluster
Dashboard lighting
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch .......................... 100 see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
Compass
see Technical data
Calibrating ..................................... 264
Daytime running lamps
Calling up ....................................... 263
Setting ........................................... 263 Display message ............................ 211
Consumption statistics (on-board Switching on/off (on-board
computer) .......................................... 189 computer) ...................................... 197
Switching on/off (switch) ................ 99
Convenience closing feature .............. 78
Dealerships
Convenience opening feature ............ 78
see Qualified specialist workshop
Coolant (engine)
Declarations of conformity ................. 23
Checking the level ......................... 269
Delayed switch-off
Display message ............................ 212
Exterior lighting (on-board
Filling capacity ............................... 333
computer) ...................................... 198
Important safety notes .................. 333
Interior lighting .............................. 198
Temperature gauge ........................ 186
Diagnostics connection ...................... 24
Warning lamp ................................. 231
Cooling Digital speedometer ......................... 190
see Climate control DIRECT SELECT lever
Cornering light function see Automatic transmission
Changing bulbs .............................. 108 Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 275
Display message ............................ 209 Display messages
Function/notes ............................. 101 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 270
Crash-responsive emergency Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 200
lighting ............................................... 104 Driving systems ............................. 215
Cruise control Engine ............................................ 212
Activation conditions ..................... 158 General notes ................................ 200
Cruise control lever ....................... 158 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 200
Deactivating ................................... 159 Lights ............................................. 208
Display message ............................ 218 Safety systems .............................. 201
Driving system ............................... 157 SmartKey ....................................... 223
Function/notes ............................. 158 Tires ............................................... 219
Important safety notes .................. 157 Vehicle ........................................... 220
Distance display (on-board
Setting a speed .............................. 159
Storing and maintaining current computer) .......................................... 194
speed ............................................. 158

8 Index
Distance recorder ............................. 189 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59

see Odometer COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 60
see Trip odometer Distance warning function ............... 60
Distance warning function Electronic brake force distribution ... 64
Activating/deactivating ................. 195 ESP® (Electronic Stability
Function/notes ................................ 60 Program) .................................... 62, 63
Warning lamp ................................. 233 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 62
DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety information ........... 59
Activation conditions ..................... 161 Overview .......................................... 58
Cruise control lever ....................... 161 STEER CONTROL ............................. 64
Deactivating ................................... 165 Driving systems
Display message ............................ 217 Active Parking Assist ..................... 172
Displays in the multifunction ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180
display ........................................... 163 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 181
Driving tips .................................... 166 Cruise control ................................ 157
Function/notes ............................. 160 Display message ............................ 215
Important safety notes .................. 159 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 159
Setting the specified minimum HOLD function ............................... 167
distance ......................................... 165 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 183
Warning lamp ................................. 233 Lane Tracking package .................. 181
Doors PARKTRONIC ................................. 169
Automatic locking (on-board Rear view camera .......................... 176
computer) ...................................... 198 Driving tips
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 74 Automatic transmission ................. 143
Central locking/unlocking Brakes ........................................... 154
(SmartKey) ....................................... 68 Break-in period .............................. 134
Control panel ................................... 35 Checking brake lining thickness .... 155
Display message ............................ 222 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 166
Emergency locking ........................... 75 Downhill gradient ........................... 154
Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 Drinking and driving ....................... 152
Important safety notes .................... 73 Driving abroad ................................. 98
Opening (from inside) ...................... 73 Driving in winter ............................. 157
Drinking and driving ......................... 152 Driving on flooded roads ................ 156
Drive program Driving on wet roads ...................... 156
Automatic ...................................... 144 Exhaust check ............................... 152
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 141 Fuel ................................................ 152
Manual ........................................... 144 General .......................................... 152
Driver's door Hydroplaning ................................. 156
see Doors Icy road surfaces ........................... 157
Driving abroad Limited braking efficiency on
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 271 salted roads ................................... 154
Symmetrical low beam .................... 98 Snow chains .................................. 301
Driving on flooded roads .................. 156 Symmetrical low beam .................... 98
Driving safety systems Wet road surface ........................... 154
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59 DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 192
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64 DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 193
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61
Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 62

Index 9
E Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 139
EASY-VARIO-PLUS system Engine oil
Cargo compartment enlargement .. 240 Adding ........................................... 268
EBD (electronic brake force Additives ........................................ 332
distribution) Checking the oil level ..................... 267
Display message ............................ 203 Checking the oil level using the
Function/notes ................................ 64 dipstick .......................................... 268
ECO display Display message ............................ 214
Function/notes ............................. 153 Filling capacity ............................... 332
On-board computer ....................... 190 Notes about oil grades ................... 332
ECO start/stop function Notes on oil level/consumption .... 267
Automatic engine start .................. 137 Viscosity ........................................ 332
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 137 ESP® (Electronic Stability
Deactivating/activating ................. 138 Program)
General information ....................... 136 Deactivating/activating ................. 194
Important safety notes .................. 136 Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 63
Electronic Stability Program Display message ............................ 201
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ETS .................................................. 62
Emergency release Function/notes ......................... 62, 63
Driver's door .................................... 75 Important safety information ........... 62
Vehicle ............................................. 75 Warning lamp ................................. 227
Emergency spare wheel ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 62
General notes ................................ 325 Exhaust check ................................... 152
Important safety notes .................. 325 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 275
Removing ....................................... 326 Exterior lighting
Technical data ............................... 326 Setting options ................................ 98
Emergency Tensioning Devices see Lights
Activation ......................................... 39 Exterior mirrors
Function ........................................... 49 Adjusting ......................................... 92
Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Emergency unlocking Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 93
Tailgate ............................................ 76 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93
Emissions control Folding in when locking (on-board
Service and warranty information .... 21 computer) ...................................... 199
Engine Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 93
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 231 Setting ............................................. 93
Display message ............................ 212 Storing settings (memory function) .. 95
ECO start/stop function ................ 136 Storing the parking position ............. 94
Engine number ............................... 329 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 237
Irregular running ............................ 139
Jump-starting ................................. 289 F
Starting problems .......................... 139
Starting the engine with the Filler cap
SmartKey ....................................... 135 see Fuel filler flap
Switching off .................................. 150 First-aid kit ......................................... 280
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 294 Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 281

10 Index
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281 G

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 282
see Emergency spare wheel Garage door opener
Floormats ........................................... 264 Clearing the memory ..................... 263
Fog lamps Important safety notes .................. 260
Extended range .............................. 102 Opening/closing the garage door .. 262
Switching on/off .............................. 99 Programming (button in the rear-
Folding table ...................................... 239 view mirror) ................................... 260
Front fog lamps Gear or selector lever (cleaning
Display message ............................ 210 guidelines) ......................................... 276
Switching on/off .............................. 99 Genuine parts ...................................... 20
Front-passenger seat Glove box ........................................... 237
Folding the backrest forward/back 239
Fuel H
Additives ........................................ 331 Handbrake
Consumption statistics .................. 189 see Parking brake
Displaying the current Hazard warning lamps ...................... 101
consumption .................................. 190 Display message ............................ 223
Displaying the range ...................... 190 Headlamps
Driving tips .................................... 152 Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 269
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29 Cleaning system (function) ............ 101
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 330 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 334
Important safety notes .................. 330 Fogging up ..................................... 103
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 330 see Automatic headlamp mode
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149 Head restraints
Refueling ........................................ 147 Adjusting ......................................... 89
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 330 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89
Fuel filler flap Adjusting (manually) ........................ 89
Opening/closing ............................ 148 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 90
Fuel level Installing/removing (rear) ................ 90
Calling up the range (on-board Heating
computer) ...................................... 190 see Climate control
Fuel tank High-beam headlamps
Capacity ........................................ 330 Changing bulbs .............................. 107
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149 Display message ............................ 210
Fuses Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Allocation chart ............................. 295 Assist on/off ................................. 102
Before changing ............................. 294 Switching on/off ........................... 100
Fuse box in the engine Hill start assist .................................. 136
compartment ................................. 294 HOLD function
Fuse box in the front-passenger Deactivating ................................... 168
footwell .......................................... 295 Display message ............................ 215
Important safety notes .................. 294 Function/notes ............................. 168
Hood
Closing ........................................... 267
Display message ............................ 222

Index 11
Important safety notes .................. 266 L

Opening ......................................... 266
Hydroplaning ..................................... 156 Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
I
Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Ignition lock Display message ............................ 215
see Key positions Function/information .................... 183
Immobilizer .......................................... 64 Lane Tracking package ..................... 181
Indicator lamps LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
see Warning and indicator lamps anchors ................................................ 54
Instrument cluster License plate lamp
Overview .......................................... 29 Changing bulbs .............................. 111
Settings ......................................... 196 License plate lamp (display
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30 message) ............................................ 210
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 186 Light function, active
Interior lighting ................................. 103 Display message ............................ 211
Automatic control .......................... 104 Lighting
Delayed switch-off (on-board Light switch ..................................... 98
computer) ...................................... 198 Lights
Emergency lighting ........................ 104 Activating/deactivating the
Manual control ............................... 104 interior lighting delayed switch-off . 198
Overview ........................................ 103 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 99
Reading lamp ................................. 103 Cornering light function ................. 101
Setting the brightness of the Display message ............................ 208
ambient lighting (on-board Driving abroad ................................. 98
computer) ...................................... 197 Fog lamps ........................................ 99
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 102
J Hazard warning lamps ................... 101
Jack High beam flasher .......................... 101
High-beam headlamps ................... 100
Storage location ............................ 280
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99
Using ............................................. 320
Parking lamps ................................ 100
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 289
Rear fog lamp ................................ 100
Setting the brightness of the
K
ambient lighting (on-board
Kickdown computer) ...................................... 197
Driving tips .................................... 143 Standing lamps .............................. 100
Manual drive program .................... 146 Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Knee bag .............................................. 44 Assist on/off ................................. 197
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) 197
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 99
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
board computer) ............................ 198

12 Index
Switching the surround lighting Roadside Assistance button .......... 254

on/off (on-board computer) .......... 198 Search & Send ............................... 256
Turn signals ................................... 100 Self-test ......................................... 252
see Changing bulbs Speed alert .................................... 259
see Interior lighting System .......................................... 252
Light sensor (display message) ....... 211 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260
Loading guidelines ............................ 236 Vehicle remote malfunction
Locking diagnosis ....................................... 258
see Central locking Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257
Locking (doors) Mechanical key
Automatic ........................................ 74 Function/notes ................................ 69
Emergency locking ........................... 75 Locking vehicle ................................ 75
From inside (central locking Unlocking the driver's door .............. 75
button) ............................................. 74 Memory card (audio) ......................... 192
Locking centrally Memory function ................................. 95
see Central locking Message memory (on-board
Locking verification signal (on- computer) .......................................... 200
board computer) ............................... 199 Messages
Low-beam headlamps see Display messages
Changing bulbs .............................. 107 Mirrors
Display message ............................ 209 see Exterior mirrors
Setting for driving abroad see Rear-view mirror
(symmetrical) ................................... 98 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Switching on/off .............................. 99 Mobile phone
Lumbar support Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar Modifying the programming
support ............................................ 90 (SmartKey) ........................................... 69
MOExtended tires .............................. 281
M Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 322
M+S tires ............................................ 300
Mounting a new wheel ................... 322
Maintenance
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 319
see ASSYST PLUS
Raising the vehicle ......................... 320
Malfunction message
Removing a wheel .......................... 322
see Display messages
Securing the vehicle against
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 273
rolling away ................................... 320
mbrace MP3
Call priority .................................... 255 Operation ....................................... 192
Display message ............................ 207 see separate operating instructions
Downloading destinations Multifunction display
(COMAND) ..................................... 256
Function/notes ............................. 188
Downloading routes ....................... 259
Permanent display ......................... 197
Emergency call .............................. 253
Multifunction steering wheel
Geo fencing ................................... 259
Operating the on-board computer . 187
Overview .......................................... 31
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258
MB info call button ........................ 255
Remote vehicle locking .................. 257

Index 13
N Panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel
Navigation Opening/closing the roller
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 191 sunblind ........................................... 82
see separate operating instructions Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134 Resetting ......................................... 82
Panorama sliding sunroof
O Important safety notes .................... 80
Occupant safety Parcel net ........................................... 239
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50 Parking ............................................... 149
Important safety notes .................... 38 Important safety notes .................. 149
Oil Parking brake ................................ 150
see Engine oil Position of exterior mirror, front-
On-board computer passenger side ................................. 94
Assistance menu ........................... 194 Rear view camera .......................... 176
Audio menu ................................... 192 see Active Parking Assist
Convenience submenu .................. 199 see PARKTRONIC
Displaying a service message ........ 270 Parking aid
Display messages .......................... 200 Active Parking Assist ..................... 172
Factory settings submenu ............. 199 see Exterior mirrors
Important safety notes .................. 186 see PARKTRONIC
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 196 Parking brake
Lighting submenu .......................... 197 Display message ............................ 203
Menu overview .............................. 189 Electric parking brake .................... 150
Message memory .......................... 200 Warning lamp ................................. 230
Navigation menu ............................ 191 Parking lamps
Operation ....................................... 187 Switching on/off ........................... 100
Service menu ................................. 196 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 108
Settings menu ............................... 196 PARKTRONIC
Standard display ............................ 189 Deactivating/activating ................. 171
Telephone menu ............................ 193 Driving system ............................... 169
Trip menu ...................................... 189 Function/notes ............................. 169
Vehicle submenu ........................... 198 Important safety notes .................. 169
Video DVD operation ..................... 193 Problem (malfunction) ................... 172
Opening and closing the side trim Range of the sensors ..................... 169
panels ................................................. 109 Warning display ............................. 170
Operating system PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
see On-board computer lamp ...................................................... 53
Outside temperature display ........... 187 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 276
Overhead control panel ...................... 34 Power washers .................................. 272
Override feature Power windows
Rear side windows ........................... 58 see Side windows
Program selector button .................. 143
P Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 20
Paint code number ............................ 328 Pulling away
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 273 Automatic transmission ................. 136
Panic alarm .......................................... 38

14 Index
Q Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24 Important safety notes .................. 147
Refueling process .......................... 148
R see Fuel
Radar sensor system Remote control
Activating/deactivating ................. 199 Garage door opener ....................... 260
Display message ............................ 215 Programming (garage door opener) 260
Radio Reporting safety defects .................... 25
Selecting a station ......................... 192 Reserve (fuel tank)
see separate operating instructions see Fuel
Reading lamp ..................................... 103 Reserve fuel
Rear compartment Display message ............................ 214
Setting the air vents ...................... 131 Warning lamp ................................. 231
Rear fog lamp see Fuel
Changing bulbs .............................. 109 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 129
Display message ............................ 210 Restraint system
Switching on/off ........................... 100 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Rear lamps System)
Changing bulbs .............................. 109 Reversing feature
see Lights Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 80
Rear seat Roller sunblinds ............................... 81
Adjusting the angle of the Side windows ................................... 77
backrests ....................................... 242 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22
Folding the backrest forwards/ Roller sunblind
back (vehicles without the EASY- Opening/closing .............................. 82
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Folding the backrest forwards/ sliding panel ..................................... 81
back (vehicles with the EASY- Roof carrier ........................................ 247
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 241 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Fore-and-aft adjustment ................ 243 guidelines) ......................................... 277
Rear view camera Roof load (maximum) ........................ 335
Cleaning instructions ..................... 275 Route (navigation)
Function/notes ............................. 176 see Route guidance (navigation)
Switching on/off ........................... 177 Route guidance (navigation) ............ 191
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 92 S
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93 Safety
Rear window defroster
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50
Problem (malfunction) ................... 129 Child restraint systems .................... 50
Switching on/off ........................... 128 Safety system
Rear window wiper
see Driving safety systems
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 113 Seat
Switching on/off ........................... 112
Folding the backrest (rear
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
compartment) forwards/back
system)

Index 15
(vehicles without the EASY- Setting the airflow ............................ 126

VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240 Side impact air bag ............................. 44
Folding the backrest (rear Side marker lamp (display
compartment) forwards/back message) ............................................ 211
(vehicles with the EASY-VARIO- Side windows
PLUS system) ................................ 241 Cleaning ......................................... 274
Seat belts Convenience closing feature ............ 78
Adjusting the height ......................... 48 Convenience opening feature .......... 78
Belt force limiters ............................ 49 Important safety information ........... 77
center rear-compartment seat ......... 48 Opening/closing .............................. 77
Cleaning ......................................... 277 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79
Correct usage .................................. 46 Resetting ......................................... 79
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 49 Sliding sunroof
Fastening ......................................... 47 see Panorama roof with power
Important safety guidelines ............. 45 tilt/sliding panel
Releasing ......................................... 48 SmartKey
Safety guidelines ............................. 40 Changing the battery ....................... 70
Warning lamp ................................. 224 Changing the programming ............. 69
Warning lamp (function) ................... 49 Checking the battery ....................... 70
Seats Convenience closing feature ............ 78
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 88 Convenience opening feature .......... 78
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88 Display message ............................ 223
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68
support ............................................ 90 Important safety notes .................... 68
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 89 Loss ................................................. 72
Cleaning the cover ......................... 276 Mechanical key ................................ 69
Correct driver's seat position ........... 86 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135
Important safety notes .................... 87 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 72
Seat heating problem ...................... 91 Starting the engine ........................ 135
Storing settings (memory function) .. 95 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) . . 135
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 91 Snow chains ...................................... 301
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 275 Sockets
Service menu (on-board computer) . 196 Center console .............................. 251
Service products Luggage compartment ................... 251
Brake fluid ..................................... 332 Points to observe before use ......... 250
Coolant (engine) ............................ 333 Rear compartment ......................... 251
Engine oil ....................................... 332 Specialist workshop ............................ 24
Fuel ................................................ 330 Speed, controlling
Important safety notes .................. 329 see Cruise control
Refrigerant (air-conditioning Speedometer
system) .......................................... 334 Activating/deactivating the
Washer fluid ................................... 334 additional speedometer ................. 196
Service work Digital ............................................ 190
see ASSYST PLUS In the Instrument cluster ................. 29
Settings Segments ...................................... 187
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 199 Selecting the unit of measurement 196
On-board computer ....................... 196 see Instrument cluster
Setting the air distribution ............... 126

16 Index
SRS (Supplemental Restraint T

System)
Display message ............................ 207 Tachometer ........................................ 187
Introduction ..................................... 38 Tailgate
Warning lamp ................................. 230 Display message ............................ 222
Warning lamp (function) ................... 39 Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Standing lamps Important safety notes .................... 75
Changing bulbs .............................. 108 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 76
Display message ............................ 210 Opening dimensions ...................... 335
Switching on/off ........................... 100 Tail lamps
Start/stop function Display message ............................ 210
see ECO start/stop function see Lights
Starting (engine) ................................ 135 Tank content
STEER CONTROL .................................. 64 Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Steering (display message) .............. 222 Technical data
Steering wheel Capacities ...................................... 329
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91 Emergency spare wheel ................. 326
Button overview ............................... 31 Information .................................... 328
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 187 Tires/wheels ................................. 323
Cleaning ......................................... 276 Vehicle data ................................... 335
Important safety notes .................... 91 TELEAID
Paddle shifters ............................... 144 Call priority .................................... 255
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 144 Downloading destinations
Stowage areas ................................... 237 (COMAND) ..................................... 256
Stowage compartments Downloading routes ....................... 259
Armrest (front) ............................... 238 Emergency call .............................. 253
Armrest (under) ............................. 238 Geo fencing ................................... 259
Center console .............................. 237 Important safety notes .................. 251
Cup holders ................................... 247 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 237 MB info call button ........................ 255
Glove box ....................................... 237 Remote vehicle locking .................. 257
Important safety information ......... 237 Roadside Assistance button .......... 254
Parcel net ...................................... 239 Search & Send ............................... 256
Under driver's seat/front- Self-test ......................................... 252
passenger seat .............................. 238 Speed alert .................................... 259
Stowage space System .......................................... 252
Center console (rear) ..................... 238 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260
Summer tires ..................................... 300 Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 258
Sun visor ............................................ 249
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257
Supplemental Restraint System
Telephone
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Accepting a call ............................. 193
System)
Display message ............................ 222
Surround lighting (on-board
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193
computer) .......................................... 198
Number from the phone book ........ 194
Switching air-recirculation mode
Redialing ........................................ 194
on/off ................................................. 129
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 194
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 65

Index 17
Temperature Increased vehicle weight due to

Coolant .......................................... 186 optional equipment (definition) ...... 316
Outside temperature ...................... 187 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 317
Setting (climate control) ................ 125 Labeling (overview) ........................ 312
Theft deterrent systems Load bearing index (definition) ...... 318
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65 Load index ..................................... 315
Immobilizer ...................................... 64 Load index (definition) ................... 317
Through-loading ................................ 239 M+S tires ....................................... 300
Time Maximum loaded vehicle weight
see separate operating instructions (definition) ..................................... 317
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 282 Maximum load on a tire (definition) 317
Tire pressure Maximum permissible tire
Checking manually ........................ 305 pressure (definition) ....................... 317
Display message ............................ 219 Maximum tire load ......................... 310
Maximum ....................................... 304 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 317
Notes ............................................. 303 MOExtended tires .......................... 300
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 284 Optional equipment weight
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 284 (definition) ..................................... 318
Recommended ............................... 301 PSI (pounds per square inch)
Tire pressure loss warning (definition) ..................................... 317
system Replacing ....................................... 319
Important safety notes .................. 305 Service life ..................................... 300
Restarting ...................................... 305 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 318
Tires Speed rating (definition) ................ 317
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 318 Storing ........................................... 319
Average weight of the vehicle Structure and characteristics
occupants (definition) .................... 316 (definition) ..................................... 316
Bar (definition) ............................... 316 Summer tires ......................... 157, 300
Changing a wheel .......................... 319 Temperature .................................. 312
Characteristics .............................. 316 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Checking ........................................ 299 (definition) ..................................... 318
Definition of terms ......................... 316 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 318
Direction of rotation ...................... 319 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 318
Display message ............................ 219 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 316
Distribution of the vehicle Tire size (data) ............................... 323
occupants (definition) .................... 318 Tire size designation, load-bearing
DOT, Tire Identification Number capacity, speed rating .................... 313
(TIN) ............................................... 315 Tire tread ....................................... 299
DOT (Department of Tire tread (definition) ..................... 318
Transportation) (definition) ............ 316 Total load limit (definition) ............. 318
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Traction ......................................... 311
(definition) ..................................... 317 Traction (definition) ....................... 318
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Tread wear ..................................... 311
(definition) ..................................... 317 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Standards ...................................... 311
Rating) (definition) ......................... 317 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Important safety notes .................. 298 Standards (definition) .................... 316
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 317

18 Index
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 318 V

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 316
see Flat tire Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 249
Top Tether ............................................ 55 Vehicle
Towing Correct use ...................................... 24
Important safety guidelines ........... 291 Data acquisition ............................... 25
Installing the towing eye ................ 292 Equipment ....................................... 21
Removing the towing eye ............... 292 Individual settings .......................... 196
Towing away Limited Warranty ............................. 25
With both axles on the ground ....... 293 Loading .......................................... 306
With front axle raised ..................... 293 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 75
Tow-starting Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68
Emergency engine starting ............ 294 Lowering ........................................ 322
Important safety notes .................. 291 Maintenance .................................... 22
Installing the towing eye ................ 292 Parking for a long period ................ 152
Removing the towing eye ............... 292 Pulling away ................................... 136
Traction control ................................... 62 Raising ........................................... 320
Transmission Reporting problems ......................... 24
see Automatic transmission Securing from rolling away ............ 320
Transmission position display ......... 141 Towing away .................................. 291
Transporting the vehicle .................. 293 Tow-starting ................................... 291
Transporting .................................. 293
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 276
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 75
Trip computer (on-board computer) 189
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68
Trip odometer
Vehicle data ................................... 335
Calling up ....................................... 189
Vehicle data ....................................... 335
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 190
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 335
Trunk
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 75
see Tailgate
Vehicle identification number
Turn signals
see VIN
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 108
Vehicle identification plate .............. 328
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 109
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 280
Display message ............................ 209
Switching on/off ........................... 100 Video (DVD) ........................................ 193
Type identification plate VIN ...................................................... 328
see Vehicle identification plate
W
U Warning and indicator lamps
Unlocking ABS ................................................ 225
Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 Brakes ........................................... 225
From inside the vehicle (central Check Engine ................................. 231
unlocking button) ............................. 74 Coolant .......................................... 231
Distance warning ........................... 233
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 233
ESP® .............................................. 227
ESP® OFF ....................................... 228
Fuel tank ........................................ 231
Overview .......................................... 30

Index 19
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 53 Wiper blades

Reserve fuel ................................... 231 Cleaning ......................................... 274
Seat belt ........................................ 224 Important safety notes .................. 112
SRS ................................................ 230 Replacing (rear window) ................ 113
Warranty ............................................ 328 Replacing (windshield) ................... 113
Washer fluid Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 276
Display message ............................ 223 Workshops
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 322 see Qualified specialist workshop
Wheel chock ...................................... 320
Wheels Z
Changing a wheel .......................... 319
ZONE function
Checking ........................................ 299
Switching on/off ........................... 126
Cleaning ......................................... 273
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 319
Emergency spare wheel ................. 325
Interchanging/changing ................ 319
Mounting a new wheel ................... 322
Mounting a wheel .......................... 319
Removing a wheel .......................... 322
Storing ........................................... 319
Tightening torque ........................... 322
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 323
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 208
Operation ......................................... 45
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 127
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 269
Notes ............................................. 334
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 223
Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
Rear window wiper ........................ 112
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 112
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 157
Snow chains .................................. 301
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 300
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 300

20 Introduction
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitchoff the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
Daimler's declared policy is one of consumption.
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner recommendations
that takes the requirements of both nature
Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account.
you to dispose of materials, first try to
You too can help to protect the environment regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
by operating your vehicle in an relevant environmental rules and regulations
environmentally responsible manner. when disposing of materials. In this way you
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, will help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should

bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
consumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Devices, as well as control units and
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
them.
vehicle:
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Rdoors
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor pillars
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rdoor sills

qualified specialist workshop. Rseats
Personal driving style: Rcockpit
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster

starting the engine. Rcenter console
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Do not install accessories such as audio
is stationary. systems in these areas. Do not carry out
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance repairs or welding. You could impair the
from the vehicle in front. operating efficiency of the restraint
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and systems.
braking.

Introduction 21
Have aftermarket accessories installed at Vehicle equipment

a qualified specialist workshop.
This Operator's Manual describes all models
You could jeopardize the operating safety of and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels your vehicle available at the time of going to
as well as accessories relevant to safety print. Country-specific differences are
which have not been approved by Mercedes. possible. Please note that your vehicle may
This could lead to malfunctions in safety- not be equipped with all features described.
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use This also applies to safety-related systems
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of and functions. The equipment in your vehicle
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and may therefore differ from some of the
accessories that have been specifically descriptions or illustrations.
approved for your vehicle.
The original purchase agreement lists all
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to systems installed in your vehicle.
strict quality control. Every part has been
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
specifically developed, manufactured or
if you have any questions about equipment or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
operation.
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
More than 300,000 different genuine
be kept in the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers Service and vehicle operation
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts for necessary service and repair work. Service and literature
In addition, strategically located parts Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
delivery centers provide quick and reliable warranties printed in the Service and
parts service. Warranty Information booklet. Your
Always specify the vehicle identification authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
number (VIN) (Y page 328) and the engine exchange or repair any defective parts
number (Y page 329) when ordering genuine originally installed in the vehicle in
Mercedes-Benz parts. accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Operator's Manual
REmission Systems Warranty
General notes REmission Performance Warranty
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
your vehicle. Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, Control Systems Warranty
follow the instructions and warning notices in RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
this manual. Disregarding them may lead to laws)
damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard
of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
22 Introduction
Maintenance If you have purchased a used car, please send

us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
all the necessary maintenance work which call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
should be done at regular intervals. Center (USA) at the hotline number
Always have the Service and Warranty 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle Customer Service (Canada) at
to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The 1-800-387-0100.
service advisor will record every service for
you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Vehicle operation outside Canada
Roadside Assistance If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign

countries, please be aware that:
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
Program offers technical help in the event of
not be readily available.
a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
converter.
(USA)
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
For additional information, refer to the engine damage.
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
for delivery in Europe through our European
Assistance" section in the Service and
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
in your vehicle literature portfolio.
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Change of address or change of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
ownership European Delivery Department
In the event of a change of address, please One Mercedes Drive
send us the "Notification of Address Change" Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or In Canada
simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
European Delivery Department
number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Customer Service Center (Canada) at Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.

Introduction 23
Operating safety In situations like this, the body, the

undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
Important safety notes could be damaged without the damage being
visible. Components damaged in this way can
G WARNING
unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an
If you do not have the prescribed service/ accident, no longer withstand the strain they
maintenance work or any required repairs are designed to.
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
combustible materials such as leaves, grass
Always have the prescribed service/ or twigs can gather between the underbody
maintenance work as well as any required and the underbody paneling. If these
repairs carried out at a qualified specialist materials come in contact with hot parts of
workshop. the exhaust system for an extended period,
they can catch fire.
G WARNING
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
If you switch off the ignition while driving, immediately at a qualified specialist
safety-relevant functions are only available workshop. If on continuing your journey you
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over
for example, the power steering and the brake and stop the vehicle immediately, paying
boosting effect. You will require considerably attention to road and traffic conditions. In
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk such cases, visit a qualified specialist
of an accident. workshop.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING Declarations of conformity

Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their Vehicle components which receive
function and/or the function of other and/or transmit radio waves
networked components. In particular, USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
systems relevant to safety could also be comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
affected. As a result, these may no longer Operation is subject to the following two
function as intended and/or jeopardize the conditions: 1) These devices may not cause
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an harmful interference, and 2) These devices
increased risk of an accident and injury. must accept any interference received,
Never tamper with the wiring as well as including interference that may cause
electronic components or their software. You undesired operation. Changes or
should have all work to electrical and modifications not expressly approved by the
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified party responsible for compliance could void
specialist workshop. the user’s authority to operate the
equipment."
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
curb or an unpaved road RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a following two conditions: (1) These devices
curb or a hole in the road may not cause interference, and (2) These
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or devices must accept any interference,
parts of the chassis.
Z
24 Introduction
including interference that may cause required on your vehicle. This is especially the
undesired operation of the device." case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at
The diagnostics connection is only intended an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at Rwork relevant to safety
a qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work
G WARNING Rrepair work
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics Ralterations, installation work and
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the modifications
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, Rwork on electronic components
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a Correct use
diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
G WARNING
Leave warning stickers in position.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
Observe the following information when
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
driving your vehicle:
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe safety notes in this manual
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Rtraffic rules and regulations
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
securely and as specified in order to ensure motor vehicles
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
Problems with your vehicle
! If the engine is switched off and
equipment on the diagnostics connection If you should experience a problem with your
is used, the starter battery may discharge. vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
information being reset, for example. This
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
requirements of the next emissions test
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
during the main inspection.
contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Qualified specialist workshop Customer Assistance Center
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
qualified specialist workshop. It has the One Mercedes Drive
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
qualifications to correctly carry out the work In Canada

Introduction 25
Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Data stored in the vehicle
Information about electronic data
Reporting safety defects acquisition in the vehicle
USA only: (Including notice pursuant to California Code
The following text is published as required of § 9951)
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of
of 1966". an accident.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect This information helps, for example, to test
which could cause a crash or could cause vehicle systems after an accident and to
injury or death, you should immediately continually improve vehicle safety.
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Daimler AG can access this data and submit
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to it:
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may purposes
open an investigation, and if it finds that a Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Ron the instruction of prosecuting
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in authorities
individual problems between you, your Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle and service organizations
Safety Hotline toll-free at Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AID) purchase agreement to find out more
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, about data that can be recorded and
SW., Washington, DC 20590. transmitted by this system.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov Information on copyright
General information
Limited Warranty Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
! Follow the instructions in this manual electronic components is available on the
about the proper operation of your vehicle following website:
as well as about possible vehicle damage. http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
Damage to your vehicle that arises from opensource
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Z
26

27
Dashboard ........................................... 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 29
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31
At a glance
Center console .................................... 32
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel .............................. 35

28 Dashboard
Dashboard
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle E Ignition lock 135
shifters 144
F Adjusting the steering
; Combination switch 100 wheel 91
= Instrument cluster 29 G Cruise control lever 158
? Horn H Electric parking brake 150
A DIRECT SELECT lever 140 I Light switch 98
B PARKTRONIC warning J Diagnostics connection 24
display 169
K Opening the hood 266
C Overhead control panel 34
D Climate control systems 118

Instrument cluster 29
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Speedometer with ? Coolant temperature 186
segments 187
A Fuel gauge
; Multifunction display 188
B Instrument cluster lighting 186
= Tachometer 187

30 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: L Low-beam E 6 SRS 230
headlamps 99
F ü Seat belt 224
; T Parking lamps 100
G ? Coolant 231
= K High-beam
headlamps 100
H R Rear fog lamp 100
I N Front fog lamps 99
? ÷ ESP® 227
J ; Check Engine 231
A ! Electric parking brake
(red) 230 K æ Reserve fuel 231
B ! Electric parking brake L å ESP® OFF 227
(yellow) 230
M ! ABS 225
C · Distance warning 233
N J Brakes 225
D #! Turn signals 100

Multifunction steering wheel 31
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 188 A =;
; Audio/COMAND display; Selects a menu 187
see the separate operating 9:
instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 187
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms your selection 187
Control System; see the
separate operating Hides display messages 200
instructions B %
? ~ Back 187
Rejects or ends a call 193 Switches off the Voice
Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the
memory separate operating
6 instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute

32 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Audio system/COMAND; A £ Hazard warning
see the separate operating lamps 101
instructions
B 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
; c Seat heating 91 OFF indicator lamp 53
= c PARKTRONIC 169 C Ú Selects the drive
program 143
? ¤ ECO start/stop
function 136

Center console 33
Center console, lower section
At a glance
D Ashtray 249 F Cup holder 247
Cigarette lighter 250 G Stowage compartment 237
Socket 250
Stowage compartment 237
H Audio/COMAND
controller; see the separate
E Stowage compartment 237 operating instructions

34 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear D F Roadside Assistance
compartment interior call button (mbrace
lighting on/off 104 system) 254
; p Switches the right- E Eyeglasses compartment 237
hand reading lamp on/off 103
F 3 Opens/closes the
= | Switches the front panorama roof with power
interior lighting/automatic tilt/sliding panel with roller
interior lighting control off 104 sunblinds 81
? ï MB Info call button G c Switches the front
(mbrace system) 255 interior lighting on 104
A Rear-view mirror 92 H p Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 103
B Buttons for the garage door
opener 262
C G SOS button (mbrace
system) 253

Door control panel 35
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 73 B W Opens/closes the
side windows 77
; %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 74 C n Activates/
deactivates the override
= r45= Saves
feature for the side
the seat and exterior mirror windows in the rear
settings 95 compartment 58
? Adjusts the seats
electrically 88
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 92

36

37
Useful information .............................. 38

Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Occupant safety .................................. 38
Children in the vehicle ........................ 50
Driving safety systems ....................... 58
Safety
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 64

38 Occupant safety
Useful information interconnected electronic systems, can lead

to the restraint systems no longer functioning
i This Operator's Manual describes all as intended.
models and all standard and optional Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
equipment of your vehicle available at the (ETDs), for example, could deploy
Safety
time of publication of the Operator's inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents

Manual. Country-specific differences are although the deceleration threshold for air
possible. Please note that your vehicle may bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
not be equipped with all features never modify the restraint systems. Do not
described. This also applies to safety- tamper with electronic components or their
related systems and functions. software.
i Read the information on qualified
In this section, you will learn the most
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
Panic alarm The restraint system consists of:
RSeat belts
RChild restraint systems
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system
Additional protection is provided by:
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
RAir bag system components with the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. The protective
functions of the system work in conjunction
X To activate: press ! button : for at with each other. Not all air bags are always
least one second. deployed in an accident.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes. i For information on infants and children
X To deactivate: press ! button :
traveling with you in the vehicle restraint
systems for infants and children, see
again.
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 50).
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Occupant safety Introduction

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:
Important safety notes
RThe 6 SRS warning lamp
G WARNING RAir bags
Modifications to or work improperly RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)
conducted on restraint system components
or their wiring, as well as tampering with

Occupant safety 39
REmergency Tensioning Device for the front on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the after the engine is started.
rear SRS functions are checked regularly when the
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat ignition is switched on or the engine is
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear running. Therefore, malfunctions can be
Safety
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming detected in good time.
into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior
in the event of an accident. It can also reduce Triggering of Emergency Tensioning
the effect of the forces to which occupants Device and air bags
are subjected during an accident. During the first stage of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates important physical
SRS warning lamp data relating to vehicle deceleration or
G WARNING acceleration, such as:
The SRS self-check has detected a Rduration
malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp: Rdirection
Rdoes Rmagnitude
not light up at all
Rdoes not go out after approximately four Based on the evaluation of this data, the air
seconds after the engine is started bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
Rlights up after the engine is started or while Emergency Tensioning Device in the first
the vehicle is in motion stage.
For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly If there is an even higher rate of vehicle
recommends that you have the system deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal
checked as soon as possible at a qualified direction, the front air bags are also deployed.
specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
to activate when it is needed in the event of bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
an accident, which could lead to serious or vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated event of a collision. In the first deployment
unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could stage, the front air bag is filled with enough
also result in injury. propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
In addition, work carried out improperly on The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause deployment threshold is reached within a few
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the milliseconds.
SRS system should only be carried out by The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bag
qualified specialist personnel. Consult a triggering thresholds are variable and are
qualified specialist workshop. adapted to the detected rate of deceleration
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is
to accommodate a person with disabilities, pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center must take place in good time at the start of
for details. USA only: for further information, the collision.
contact our Customer Assistance Center at The rate of vehicle deceleration or
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). acceleration and the direction of the force are
essentially determined by:
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument Rthe distribution of forces during the
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched collision
Rthe collision angle
Z
40 Occupant safety
Rthe deformation characteristics of the installed or supplied by an authorized

vehicle Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthe characteristics of the object with which RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
the vehicle has collided Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
Factors that can only be seen and measured perchlorate material, which may require
Safety
after a collision has occurred do not play a special handling and regard for the
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, environment. Check your national disposal
nor do they provide an indication of air bag guidelines. In California, see
deployment. www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, Perchlorate/index.cfm.
e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bag RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
being deployed. This is the case if only parts on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
which are relatively easily deformed are that has deployed must be replaced.
affected and the rate of deceleration is not RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed They could tear.
even though the vehicle suffers only minor RDo not make any modification that could
deformation. This is the case if, for example, change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may
body members are hit, and sufficient
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
deceleration occurs as a result.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
i The front Emergency Tensioning Devices RDo not make any modifications to the SRS
can only be triggered if the seat belt wiring or components.
tongues on the front seats are correctly RDo not modify or remove any components
engaged in the seat belt buckles. or parts of the SRS.
i Not all air bags are deployed in an RDo not install additional trim material, seat
accident. The different air bag systems covers, badges, etc. to the:
work independently of each other. - padded steering wheel boss
How the air bag system works is - knee bag covers
determined by predicting the severity of - front-passenger air bag cover
the accident, especially vehicle
- outer side of front seat bolsters
deceleration or acceleration, and the type
of accident: - outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seat
backrest
Rhead-on collision
- roof frame trim
Rside impact
RDo not install additional electrical/
Rrollover
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
Safety guidelines for seat belts, RKeep the area between the air bags and
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,
and air bags
handbags, umbrellas etc.).
G WARNING RDo not hang any objects such as coat
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have hangers on the coat hooks or the grab
been subjected to stress in an accident handle above the door. These items may be
must be replaced. Their anchoring points thrown around in the vehicle and cause
must also be checked. Only use seat belts

Occupant safety 41
head and other injuries when the window However, no system available today can
curtain air bag is deployed. completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
RAir bag system components will be hot after When the air bags are deployed, a small
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. amount of powder is released. The powder
RNever rest your feet on the dashboard or generally does not constitute a health hazard
Safety
the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
in front of the seat. vehicle. In order to prevent potential
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a breathing difficulties, you should leave the
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
causing unintended air bag deployment. have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
Work on the SRS must therefore only be out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
performed by qualified technicians. then get fresh air by opening a window or
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz door.
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
G WARNING
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or In order to reduce the potential danger of
ETD, our safety instructions must be injuries caused during the deployment of the
followed. These are available from any front air bags, the driver and front passenger
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. must always be correctly seated and wear
their seat belts.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material For maximum protection in the event of a
of the air bags, there is the possibility of collision, you must always be in the normal
abrasions or other, potentially more serious seat position with your back against the
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
that it is correctly positioned on your body.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz As the air bag inflates with considerable
strongly recommends that you inform the speed and force, a proper seating position
subsequent owner that the vehicle is and correct positioning of the hands on the
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
applicable section in the Operator's Manual. distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
Air bags seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
G WARNING in a position that is as upright as possible
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence with your back against the backrest.
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front- possible, still permitting proper operation
passenger front air bags and driver's knee of vehicle controls. The distance from the
bag) center of the driver's chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
window curtain air bags)
should be able to accomplish this by
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
Z
42 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an restraint, or booster seat

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. recommended for the size and
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the weight of the child.
steering wheel or dashboard. (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
Safety
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
increase the risk and potential severity of bang, and a small amount of powder may also
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
inflates. affect your hearing. The powder that is
Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back released generally does not constitute a
as possible from the dashboard when the health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
seat is occupied. lights up.
Roccupants, especially children, should The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
never place their bodies or lean their heads unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
in the area of the door where the side the event of such a situation will the air bags
impact air bag inflates. This could result in provide their supplemental protection.
serious or fatal injuries should the side If the driver and front passenger do not wear
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
upright as possible, wear the seat belt bags to provide their supplemental
properly and use an appropriately sized protection.
infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster In the event of other types of impacts and
seat recommended for the size and weight impacts below air bag deployment
of the child. thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The
Failure to follow these instructions can result driver and passenger will then be protected
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. to the extent possible by a properly fastened
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
make the buyer aware of this safety needed to provide the best possible
information. Be sure to give the buyer this protection in a rollover.
Operator's Manual. Air bags provide additional protection; they
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
G WARNING All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
Accident research shows that the safest place belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. equipped with air bags or not.
A side impact air bag related injury may occur It is important for your safety and that of your
if occupants, especially children, are not passengers to have deployed air bags
properly seated or restrained when next to a replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
side impact air bag which needs to deploy bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. air bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
event of a crash.
follow these guidelines:
(1) Always sit as upright as possible Front air bags
and use the seat belts properly.
Make sure that children 12 years ! Make sure that there are no objects
old and under use an appropriately exerting force on the front-passenger seat.
sized child restraint, infant This could cause the system to identify the
seat as being occupied, and in the event of

Occupant safety 43
an accident, the restraint systems on the If a child restraint system is installed on the
front-passenger side might be triggered. front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER
Have triggered restraint systems replaced. AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp on the
center console is not on:
Ra child restraint system without a
Safety
transponder for the air bag deactivation
system is installed or
Ra child restraint system with a transponder
has not been installed properly.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
event of a collision. In the first deployment
stage, the front air bag is filled with part of the
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
total available propellant gas, thereby
steering wheel; front-passenger front air reducing the risk of injury. If the air bag
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove control unit recognizes within a few
box. milliseconds that the vehicle is being braked
The front air bags increase protection for the or accelerated faster than originally
driver's and front-passenger's head and predicted, the front air bag is filled with the
chest. maximum amount of propellant gas available.
They are deployed: The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a (predicted at the start of the impact) for
longitudinal direction second stage inflation of the front-passenger
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum
Rif the system determines that air bag
amount of propellant gas available.
deployment can offer additional protection
The front air bags are not deployed in
to that provided by the seat belt
situations where a low impact severity is
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
predicted. You will then be protected by the
used fastened seat belt.
Rindependently of other air bags in the
The front-passenger front air bag will only
vehicle deploy if:
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center
generally not deployed.
console is not lit (Y page 53)
Front-passenger air bag ; is only activated
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high
if the system determines that the front-
impact severity
passenger seat is occupied. The 4
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on
the center console does not light up
(Y page 53).
Z
44 Occupant safety
Driver's knee bag doors create a risk of rendering the side

impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Safety
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the

steering column. The driver's knee bag is
always deployed along with the driver's front
air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to
operate together with the front air bags in
frontal impacts if certain thresholds are Front side impact air bags : and rear side
exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
best in conjunction with correctly positioned
and fastened seat belts. seat cushions.
Driver's knee bag : increases the driver's When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection of the thorax for
protection against:
occupants on the front seats as well as also
Rknee injuries of the pelvis for the vehicle occupants on the
Rthigh injuries side of the vehicle on which the impact
Rlower leg injuries occurs. However, they do not protect the:
Rhead
Side impact air bags Rneck
Rarms
G WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested The side impact air bags are deployed:
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your Ron the side on which an impact occurs
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
interfere with or prevent the deployment of of lateral vehicle deceleration or
the side impact air bags. Contact an acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
availability.
Rindependently of the front air bags
G WARNING Rindependently of the ETDs
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air
control are located in the doors. Do not bags are generally not deployed. Side impact
modify any components of the doors or door air bags are deployed if the system detects
trim panels including, for example, the high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a
addition of door speakers. lateral direction and determines that side
Improper repair work on the doors or the impact air bag deployment can offer
modification or addition of components to the

Occupant safety 45
additional protection to that provided by the Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
seat belt. the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side system determines that air bag deployment
impacts which do not exceed the system's can offer the vehicle occupants additional
preset deployment thresholds for lateral protection to that provided by the seat belt
Safety
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
protected by the fastened seat belt. Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
The side impact air bag on the front- seat is occupied
passenger side is not deployed in the Rindependently of the front air bags
following situations: Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger the event of impacts which do not exceed the
seat is unoccupied. system's preset deployment thresholds for
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
fastened. then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of Seat belts
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Important safety notes
or not.
G WARNING
Window curtain air bags Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
be considerably more severe without your
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
Window curtain air bags : enhance the level the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
of protection for the head, but not chest or it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
the vehicle on which the impact occurs. death is lessened if you are properly wearing
Window curtain air bags : are integrated your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
into the side of the roof frame and deployed as intended if the occupants are properly
in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. wearing their seat belts.
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
G WARNING
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Z
46 Occupant safety
it, the seat belt would apply force at the i See "Children in the vehicle"
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious (Y page 50) for further information on
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and infants and children traveling in the vehicle
seat belt provide the best restraint when the as well as on child restraint systems.
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
Proper use of the seat belts
Safety
possible and the seat belt is properly

positioned on the body.
G WARNING
G WARNING USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than RSeat belts can only work when used
there are seat belts available. Make sure properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly way than as described in this section, as
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never that could result in serious injuries in the
use a seat belt for more than one person at a event of an accident.
time. REach occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
G WARNING the likelihood of and potential severity of
Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
that have been subjected to a load in an The integrated restraint system includes
accident replaced and the anchorages SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
checked. bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
Only use seat belts that have been approved impact air bags, window curtain air bags for
by Mercedes-Benz. the side windows), Emergency Tensioning
Never tamper with seat belts. This can result Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front
in the unintended deployment of the seat knee bolsters.
Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure The system is designed to enhance the
to deploy when necessary. protection offered to properly belted
Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
severely weaken them. In the event of a driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
collision, they may be unable to provide (side impact air bags, window curtain air
adequate protection. bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
Have all work carried out only by qualified
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
technicians. Consult a qualified specialist
and ETDs).
workshop.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
The use of seat belts and infant and child arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
restraint systems is required by law in: In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
Rall 50 states
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
Rthe U.S. territories
belt would also apply too much force to the
Rthe District of Columbia ribs or abdomen, which could severely
Rall Canadian provinces injure internal organs such as your liver or
Even where this is not required by law, all spleen.
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
their seat belts before starting the journey. section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not

Occupant safety 47
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder G WARNING

portion of the seat belt under your arm. For Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.
the seat belt outlet. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
Safety
your hips and not across the abdomen. If This could damage the seat belt.
the lap belt is positioned across your Never attempt to make modifications to seat
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
a crash. the seat belts.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
Fastening seat belts
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries. G WARNING
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted According to accident statistics, children are
snugly. Take special care of this when safer when properly restrained on the rear
wearing loose clothing. seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
RNever use a seat belt for more than one we strongly recommend that children be
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
around a person and another person or Regardless of seating position, children 12
other objects at the same time. years old and under must be seated and
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a properly secured in an appropriately sized
crash, you would not have the full width of child restraint system or booster seat
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. recommended for the size and weight of the
The twisted seat belt against your body child. For additional information, see the
could cause injuries. "Children in the vehicle" section.
RPregnant women should also always use a A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion significantly increased if the child restraints
should be positioned as low as possible on are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on or the child is not properly secured in the child
the abdomen. restraint.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Z
48 Occupant safety
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to Using the seat belt for the center rear-
an almost vertical position (Y page 86). compartment seat
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
sash guide :. down and back up again, the rear center seat
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be
Safety
section of the seat belt across the middle pulled out.

of your shoulder and the lap section across X To release the rear center seat belt: pull
your pelvis. the seat belt out approximately 1 in
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the and then release it again.
appropriate height (Y page 48). The seat belt is retracted and released.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt Releasing seat belts
across your body.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
Information on releasing the seat belt with up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
release button ?(Y page 48). will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
Belt height adjustment the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
their protective function and must be
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
You can adjust the seat belt height on the

front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
X Release belt sash guide release : and
guide :.
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.

Occupant safety 49
Belt warning for the driver and front i For more information on the 7 seat
passenger belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
Regardless of whether the driver's and front- indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
passenger seat belts have already been seat belts" (Y page 224).
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
Safety
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out if the driver and belt force limiters
the front passenger have already fastened G WARNING
their seat belts.
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when replaced.
the engine is started, an additional warning
For your safety, when disposing of the
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
a maximum of six seconds or once the
instructions. These are available at any
driver's seat belt is fastened.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If after six seconds the driver or front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts ! If the front-passenger seat is not
and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt occupied, do not engage the seat belt
warning lamp lights up: tongue in the buckle on the front-
Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
belt is fastened Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is event of an accident.
exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
increasing intensity for a maximum of in the rear are equipped with Emergency
60 seconds or until the driver or front- Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
passenger seat belt has been fastened. limiters.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the pulling them close against the body.
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
warning tone sounds again. positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
front-passenger seat belt has still not been towards the backrest.
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt The ETDs can only be activated when:
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
Rthe ignition is switched on.
illuminated.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat "SRS warning lamp" 6(Y page 39).
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). each of the front seat belts.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
out if: compartment are triggered independently of
the lock status of the seat belts.
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
have fastened their seat belts.
and severity of an accident:
or
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
collision, the vehicle decelerates or
Z
50 Children in the vehicle
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal The infant or child restraint must be properly

direction during the initial stages of the secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
impact belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
opposite the impact the vehicle child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Safety
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a Occupants, especially children, should always

lateral direction sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle properly and use an appropriately sized infant
rolls over, the system determines that it restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
can provide additional protection recommended for the size and weight of the
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, child.
and a small amount of powder may also be Children can be killed or seriously injured by
released. Only in rare cases will the bang an inflating air bag. Note the following
affect your hearing. The powder that is important information when circumstances
released generally does not constitute a require you to place a child in the front
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp passenger seat:
lights up. RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat technology designed to deactivate the front
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the passenger front air bag in your vehicle
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle when the system senses the weight of a
occupant is reduced. typical 12-month-old child or less along
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats with the weight of a standard appropriate
are synchronized with the front air bags, child restraint on the front passenger seat.
which take on a part of the deceleration force. RFor children larger than the typical
This results in the force exerted on the 12-month-old child, the front passenger
occupant being distributed over a greater front air bag may or may not be activated.
area. Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Children in the vehicle RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Child restraint systems front passenger seat will be seriously

injured or even killed if the front passenger
Important safety notes front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
G WARNING even with the air bag technology installed
According to accident statistics, children are in your vehicle. The only means to
safer when properly restrained in the rear completely eliminate this risk is to never
seating positions than in the front seating place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that in the front seat. We therefore strongly
children be placed in the rear seats whenever recommend that you always place a child
possible. Regardless of seating position, in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
children 12 years old and under must be RIf you must install a rear-facing child
seated and properly secured in an appropriate restraint on the front passenger seat
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster because circumstances require you to do
seat recommended for the size and weight of so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
the child.
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front

Children in the vehicle 51
passenger front air bag is deactivated. becoming a projectile in the event of an

Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not accident.
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. G WARNING
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Safety
lamp while driving to make sure the 4 SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or Do not leave children unattended in the
remains out, do not transport a child on the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
front passenger seat until the system has restraint system, or with access to an
been repaired. unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the access to a vehicle could result in an accident
front passenger seat will be seriously and/or serious personal injury. The children
injured or even killed if the front passenger could:
front air bag inflates. Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
facing child restraint on the front passenger excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
use the proper child restraint vehicle equipment that can be operated
recommended for the age, size and weight even if the SmartKey is removed from the
of the child, and secure child restraint with ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
the vehicle's seat belt according to the such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
child seat manufacturer's instructions. adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
G WARNING
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
Infants and small children should never share themselves or be injured by following traffic.
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
Do not expose the child restraint system to
of an accident, they could be crushed
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
between the occupant and seat belt.
metal parts, for example, could become very
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is hot, and the child could be burned on these
significantly increased if the child restraints parts.
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child G WARNING
restraint.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
Children that are too large for a child restraint passenger compartment or trunk unless they
must travel in seats using normal seat belts. are firmly secured in place.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster
increases a child's risk of injury in the event
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat
of
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/ Rstrong braking maneuvers
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Rsudden changes of direction
seat. Ran accident
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
Z
Further information on secure stowage of Child restraint system on the front-

loads can be found under "Loading passenger seat
guidelines".
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
G WARNING
If the front-passenger air bag is not disabled:
RSecure the child with a child or infant seat
Safety
Ra child secured in a child restraint system

restraint system appropriate to the age and
weight of the child. on the front-passenger seat could be
RMake sure that the infant or child is
seriously or even fatally injured by the front-
passenger air bag deploying. This is
properly secured at all times while the
especially a risk if the child is in the
vehicle is in motion.
immediate vicinity of the front-passenger
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always air bag when it deploys.
properly secure all infants and children with Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint
trip.
system. Only secure a rearward-facing
The use of seat belts and infant and child child restraint system on a suitable rear
restraint systems is required by law in: seat.
Rall 50 states Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
Rthe U.S. territories the rearmost position if you secure a child
Rthe District of Columbia in a forward-facing child restraint system
Rall Canadian provinces on the front-passenger seat.
Infants and children must always be seated in The front-passenger air bag is not disabled:
an appropriate infant or child restraint system Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivation
recommended for the size and weight of the system on the front-passenger seat.
child. The infant or child restraint system Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
must be properly secured in accordance with system on the front-passenger seat, unless
the manufacturer's instructions. a child restraint system with transponders
All infant or child restraint systems must meet for an air bag deactivation system is
the following standards: installed on the front-passenger seat
RU.S. Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 system on the front-passenger seat, if the
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
213 and 210.2 4 is not lit.
Confirmation that the child restraint system To make you aware of this danger, a
corresponds to the standards can be found corresponding warning sticker has been
on an instruction label on the child restraint affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of
system. This confirmation can also be found the sun visor on the front-passenger side.
in the installation instructions that are Information about recommended child
included with the child restraint system. restraint systems is available at any
Always read and follow the manufacturer's authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
instructions when using an infant or child
restraint system or booster seat.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior or on the infant or child restraint.

Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the
rearmost position.
Rhave the air bag deactivation system
Safety
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To ensure that the air bag deactivation system
on the front-passenger seat functions/
communicates correctly, never place objects,
e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor system. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
cannot perform its intended protective
function in the event of an accident, and could
lead to injuries.
G WARNING
Do not place electronic devices on the front-
passenger seat, e.g.:
Rlaptops, when switched on
Rmobile phones
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
access cards
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat that is protected by an air Signals from electronic equipment can cause
bag installed in front of it. interference in the sensor system of the air
bag deactivation system. This can lead to a
Air bag deactivation system on the system malfunction. This may cause the
front-passenger seat 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp to light up even if no child seat with a
G WARNING transponder for an air bag deactivation
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF system is installed. The front-passenger air
indicator lamp does not light up when the bag would not then deploy during an accident.
child restraint system is installed, the front- It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning
passenger air bag has not been disabled. If lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER
the front-passenger air bag deploys, the child AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
could be seriously or even fatally injured. briefly when you turn the key in the ignition
Proceed as follows: lock to position 2.
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
Rinstall a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a suitable rear seat.
or
Z
i If the front-passenger front air bag is

disabled by the air bag deactivation
system, the following remain enabled on
the front-passenger side:
Rthe side impact air bag
Safety
Rthe window curtain air bag

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

in the rear
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
does not have an air bag deactivation system, G WARNING
this is indicated by a special sticker. The Children that are too large for a child restraint
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is Position the shoulder belt across the chest
visible when you open the front-passenger and shoulder, not the face or neck.
door. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
Vehicles without an air bag deactivation proper seat belt positioning for children over
system on the front-passenger seat: if you 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition a normal shoulder/lap belt fit properly
lock, the 45 indicator lamp lights up without a booster.
briefly but has no function. It does not Install the child seat according to
indicate that there is an air bag deactivation manufacturer's instructions.
system on the front-passenger seat. The child seat must be firmly attached to both
anchors.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
could come loose during an accident and
seriously or even fatally injure the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mountings must be replaced.
! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)

child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt for the center seat does not get
trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be
The sensor system for the air bag deactivation damaged.
system detects whether a special Mercedes-
Benz child seat with a transponder for the air
bag deactivation system has been installed.
In this case, 45 indicator lamp :
lights up. The front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated:

is then no longer supported correctly or held

in position and can no longer perform its
intended function. This can cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
Safety
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when
installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
securing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Secure child restraint systems without a
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system using the seat belts in the vehicle.
When installing child restraint systems, you
must observe the manufacturer's installation Top Tether provides an additional connection
instructions. between a child restraint system, secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
Top Tether and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
G WARNING on the rear side of the rear seat backrests.
If the red display is visible when the rear seat X Move head restraint : upwards.
backrest is upright, it means the rear seat
X Release rear seat backrest = and fold it
backrest is not engaged correctly.
forwards (Y page 240).
Always engage the rear seat backrests in an
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
upright position if there are passengers in the
rear compartment. Engage the rear seat restraint : between the two head restraint
backrests in an upright position after you have bars.
installed the Top Tether belt or if the extended X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
cargo compartment is not being used. Push B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
and pull the rear seat backrests to check
whether they are engaged correctly. The rear
seat backrest may fold down if it is not
engaged correctly. The child restraint system
Z
Make sure that:

RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown.
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear
Safety
seat backrest = and cargo

compartment cover ; if cargo
compartment cover ; is installed.
X Swing back rear seat backrest = until it
engages.
The red lock verification indicator is no
longer visible.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 90). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt B.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so. Make sure that
Top Tether belt B is tight.

Problems with the air bag deactivation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45 A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a
indicator lamp on the transponder for air bag deactivation system has been installed to
Safety
center console is lit. the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag has
therefore been disabled as desired.
G WARNING
There is no child restraint system installed on the front-passenger
seat. The air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/
or the 45 indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you
switch the ignition on.
There is a risk of injury.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
for example:
RLaptop
RMobile phone
RCards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
If the 45 indicator lamp remains lit:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Child-proof locks G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
G WARNING the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear Do not leave children unattended in the
doors and the override switch for the rear vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
windows when children are travelling in the restraint system, or with access to an
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in access to a vehicle could result in an accident
motion and injure themselves or others. and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
Z
58 Driving safety systems
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel Override feature for the rear side
adjustment, or the memory function windows
If children open a door, they could injure other G WARNING
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
Safety
Do not expose the child restraint system to children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's themselves in the rear side window.
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
children ride in the rear always secure the rear
doors with the child-proof locks.
X To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If the indicator lamp is off, operation
is possible using the switches in the rear
compartment.
Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems
You can secure each door individually with
In this section, you will find information about
the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
the following driving safety systems:
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened (Y page 64)
from the outside. RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 59)
X To activate: press the child-proof lock RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (adaptive
lever up in the direction of arrow :. Brake Assist and distance warning signal)
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are (Y page 60)
working properly. RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 62)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;. (Y page 62)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 64)

Driving safety systems 59
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64) are deactivated. There is an increased danger

(Y page 64) of skidding and accidents.
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 64) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Safety
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
If you fail to adapt your driving style or
including driving safety systems, will also
become distracted, the driving safety
become inoperative. Observe the information
systems can neither reduce the risk of
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 225) and
accident nor override the laws of physics.
display messages which may be shown in the
Driving safety systems are merely aids
instrument cluster (Y page 201).
designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
good time. Always adapt your driving style to This allows you to continue steering the
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic vehicle when braking.
conditions and maintain a safe distance from ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface
conditions. ABS works on slippery roads,
i The driving safety systems described only
even if you only brake gently.
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tires and The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
the road surface. Pay particular attention cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
to the information regarding tires, on. It goes out when the engine is running.
recommended minimum tire tread depths
etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section Braking
(Y page 298). X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
In wintry driving conditions, always use brake pedal vigorously until the braking
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, situation is over.
snow chains. Only in this way will the X To make a full brake application:
driving safety systems described in this depress the brake pedal with full force.
section work as effectively as possible.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
Important safety notes functions as a reminder to take extra care
i Observe the "Important safety notes" while driving.
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
BAS (Brake Assist System)
G WARNING
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when section (Y page 59).
braking. The steerability and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems
Z
G WARNING In such cases, the distance warning function

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance may:
in an emergency braking situation is Rgive an unnecessary warning
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rnot give a warning
In an emergency braking situation, depress Always pay careful attention to the traffic
Safety
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents situation and do not rely solely on the
the wheels from locking. distance warning function.
BAS operates in emergency braking Function
situations. If you depress the brake pedal X To activate/deactivate: activate or
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking deactivate the distance warning function in
force, thus shortening the stopping distance. the on-board computer (Y page 195).
The brakes will function as usual once you If the distance warning function is activated,
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. the Ä symbol appears in the multifunction
display unless the HOLD function is active
(Y page 168).
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
On vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the
General notes Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged
or you are driving faster than 22 mph
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
(35 km/h).
the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance
warning function, which are described in the The distance warning function can help you
following. to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
Distance warning function such a collision. If the distance warning
function detects that there is a risk of a
Important safety notes collision, you will be warned visually and
i Observe the "Important safety notes" acoustically. The distance warning function
section for driving safety systems cannot prevent a collision without your
(Y page 59). intervention.
Starting at a speed of around 20 mph
G WARNING (30 km/h), this function warns you if you
The distance warning function does not react: rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
Rto people or animals intermittent warning tone will then sound and
Rto
the · distance warning lamp will light up
oncoming vehicles
in the instrument cluster.
Rto crossing traffic
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Rwhen cornering
distance from the vehicle in front.
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
or
provide a warning in all critical situations.
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
There is a risk of an accident.
so.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake. For the distance warning function to assist
you when driving, the function must be
The distance warning function cannot always activated in the on-board computer and be
clearly identify objects and complex traffic operational (Y page 195).
situations.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly Always pay careful attention to the traffic
complicated driving conditions may cause the situation and be ready to brake.
system to display unnecessary warnings.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the G WARNING
distance warning function can detect Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Safety
obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle Rto people or animals
for an extended period of time.
Rto oncoming vehicles
At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), the
Rto crossing traffic
distance warning function may also detect
stationary obstacles, for example stopped or Rto stationary obstacles
parked vehicles. Rwhen cornering
If you approach an obstacle and the distance As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
warning function detects a risk of a collision, intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
the system will initially alert you both visually risk of an accident.
and acoustically. Always pay careful attention to the traffic
In particular, the detection of obstacles can situation and be ready to brake.
be impaired if:
Rdirt
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking
on the sensors or anything else
assistance in hazardous situations at speeds
covering the sensors
greater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and uses
Rsnow or heavy rain
radar sensor technology to assess the traffic
Rinterference by other radar sources situation.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for With the help of a sensor system, adaptive
example in parking garages Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a the path of your vehicle for an extended
motorbike period of time.
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Should you approach an obstacle and
relative to the center of your vehicle Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of
Following damage to the front end of the collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end
of the radar sensor checked at a qualified collision. Should you apply the brakes
specialist workshop. This also applies to vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will
collisions at low speeds where there is no automatically increase the braking force to a
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. level suitable for the traffic conditions.
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
Adaptive Brake Assist emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
section for driving safety systems The brakes will work normally again if:
(Y page 59). Ryou release the brake pedal.
G WARNING Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly collision.

identify objects and complex traffic Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake vehicle.

Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
accident.
Z
Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph the hazard warning lamps using the hazard
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable warning button (Y page 101).
of reacting to moving objects that have
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
already been recognized as such at least once
certain countries.
over the period of observation. Adaptive
Brake Assist does not react to stationary
Safety
obstacles.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due
to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, General notes
the brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
section (Y page 59).
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is: ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
Rdirt
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
on the sensors or anything else
the road surface.
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
Rinterference by other radar sources
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
example in parking garages keep the vehicle on the desired course within
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
motorbike pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the ETS (Electronic Traction System)
vehicle, have the configuration and operation i Observe the "Important safety notes"
of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
(Y page 59).
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
they spin. This enables you to pull away and
Adaptive brake lights accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example
If you brake sharply from a speed of more if the road surface is slippery on one side.
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS ETS remains active when you deactivate
or Adaptive Brake Assist, the brake lamps ESP®.
flash rapidly. In this way, traffic traveling
behind you is warned in an even more Important safety notes
noticeable manner.
G WARNING
If you brake sharply to a standstill from a
speed of more than 70 km/h, the hazard If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
warning lamps are activated automatically. If stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps driving safety systems are deactivated. This
light up continuously. The hazard warning increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
lamps switch off automatically if you travel Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off qualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brake Deactivating/activating ESP®

on a braking dynamometer, switch off the
ignition. Application of the brakes by Important safety notes
ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake i Observe the "Important safety notes"
system. section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
Safety
When towing your vehicle with the front axle
raised, observe the notes on You can select between the following states
ESP®(Y page 293). of ESP®:
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF RESP® is activated.
warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights RESP® is deactivated.
up continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the G WARNING
å ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
continuously, ESP® is not available due to a stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
malfunction. risk of skidding and an accident.
Observe the information on warning lamps Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
(Y page 227) and display messages which described in the following.
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 201). It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
i Only use wheels with the recommended Rwhen using snow chains
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
Rin deep snow
properly.
Ron sand or gravel
Characteristics of ESP® i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations

described above no longer apply. ESP® will
General information
otherwise not be able to stabilize the
ESP® is activated automatically when the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a
engine is started. wheel starts to spin.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
If ESP® intervenes: You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any Deactivating/activating ESP®
circumstances.
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
on-board computer.
as necessary when pulling away.
X To deactivate:(Y page 194).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function X To activate:(Y page 194).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Z
64 Theft deterrent locking system
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated (Y page 136). For further information, see
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels Driving tips (Y page 154).
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such
STEER CONTROL
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
Safety
If you deactivate ESP®: STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a

noticeable steering force to the steering
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. wheel in the direction required for vehicle
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and stabilization.
the drive wheels are able to spin. The This steering assistance is provided in
spinning of the wheels results in a cutting particular if:
action, which provides better grip.
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
RETS is still active.
a wet or slippery road surface when you
RESP® still provides support when you
brake
brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive

EBD (electronic brake force steering support from STEER CONTROL.
distribution) Power steering will, however, continue to
function.
(Y page 59). Theft deterrent locking system
G WARNING Immobilizer
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
being started without the correct SmartKey.
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
X To activate: remove the SmartKey from
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the ignition lock.
the brake system checked at a qualified X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
specialist workshop. When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
Observe information regarding indicator and engine can be started by anyone with a valid
warning lamps (Y page 225) as well as SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
display messages (Y page 203).
EBD monitors and controls the brake i The immobilizer is always deactivated
pressure on the rear wheels to improve when you start the engine.
driving stability while braking. In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
and offers increased braking comfort. In
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
BRAKE also has the HOLD function
(Y page 168) and hill start assist

Theft deterrent locking system 65
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
call to the Customer Assistance Center
automatically. The Tele Aid system will
initiate the call provided that:
Safety
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service.
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
supply and GPS coverage are available.
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the

SmartKey.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
or
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Ra door
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey

into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
Z
66

67

SmartKey ............................................. 68
Doors .................................................... 73
Cargo compartment ............................ 75
Side windows ...................................... 77
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ........................................ 80
Opening and closing

68 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
models and all standard and optional unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
equipment of your vehicle available at the could cause the engine to be switched off.
time of publication of the Operator's There is a risk of an accident.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
Opening and closing
not be equipped with all features before inserting the SmartKey into the
described. This also applies to safety- ignition lock.
related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
SmartKey vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Important safety notes Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
G WARNING phone or another SmartKey
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
they could: foil
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. SmartKey functions
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of : & To lock the vehicle
reach of children. ; % To unlock the vehicle
X To unlock centrally: press button ;.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected If you do not open the vehicle within
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even Rthe vehicle is locked again.
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
vehicle. again.

SmartKey 69
X To lock centrally: press button :. simultaneously for approximately six

seconds until the battery check lamp
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
flashes twice (Y page 70).
Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap Mechanical key
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
General notes
and three times when locking.
Opening and closing

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
i When it is dark, the surround lighting also
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 198). If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
i You can also set an audible signal to system will be triggered (Y page 65).
confirm that the vehicle has been locked. There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
The audible signal can be activated and
deactivated using the on-board computer X Press the % or & button on the
(Y page 199). SmartKey.
or
Changing the settings of the locking
system If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
You can change the settings of the locking automatically.
system. When you then unlock the vehicle X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap SmartKey into the ignition lock.
are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently
travel on your own.
Removing the mechanical key
XTo change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
(Y page 70) flashes twice.
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the
vehicle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks
or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:

X Push release catch : in the direction of
X To unlock the driver's door: press the the arrow and at the same time remove
% button once. mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
Z
70 SmartKey
SmartKey battery i If the SmartKey battery is checked within

the signal reception range of the vehicle,
Important safety notes pressing the & or % button:
G WARNING Rlocksor
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive Runlocks the vehicle
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
i You can get a battery at any qualified
result in severe health problems. There is a
specialist workshop.
Opening and closing
risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If Replacing the battery
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate SmartKey (Y page 69).
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the battery

X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 70). X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.

SmartKey 71
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray
cover : and then press to close it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
Opening and closing

on the vehicle.
Z
72 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening and closing
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary
(Y page 70).
X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % /
& button.
The SmartKey is faulty.

X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors 73

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 285).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

started using the X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
SmartKey. doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
they could: vehicle.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Unlocking and opening doors from
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
the inside
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

motion if, for example, they:
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.

leave children or animals unattended in the X To unlock a front door: pull door
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of handle ;.
reach of children.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
Z
74 Doors
X To open a front door: pull door You can open a door from inside the vehicle
handle ;. even if it has been locked. You can open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
are secured by the child-proof lock
knob :. (Y page 58).
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Opening and closing
even if it has been locked. You can open the Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they If the vehicle has been locked using the
are secured by the child-proof lock locking button for the central locking, or has
(Y page 58). been locked automatically, and a door is
If the vehicle has previously been locked with opened from the inside:
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. previously been fully unlocked
Switch off the alarm (Y page 65). Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle Automatic locking feature
from the inside. This can be useful if you wish
to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for
example.
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
X To unlock: press button :. about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To lock: press button ;.
i If you press one of the two buttons and
The vehicle locks when all the doors and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
the tailgate are closed.
already been selected.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
locked or unlocked.
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from turning.
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey.

Cargo compartment 75
You could therefore lock yourself out if: X Open the driver's door.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
Rthe vehicle is being towed. doors and the tailgate.

Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X Press the locking button (Y page 74).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board front-passenger door and the rear doors
computer (Y page 198). are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 73).
Opening and closing

X Close the driver's door.
Unlocking the driver's door X Take the mechanical key out of the
(mechanical key) SmartKey (Y page 69).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 65).
SmartKey (Y page 69).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far

as it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise SmartKey.

to position 1. i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
The door is unlocked. the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove theft alarm system is not armed.
it.
SmartKey. Cargo compartment
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) G WARNING
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
SmartKey, use the mechanical key. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
Z
76 Cargo compartment
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust

fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
Opening and closing
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or

cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the X Pull handle :.
vehicle.
X Raise the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure Closing
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 335).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.
The tailgate can be:
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
Ropened and closed manually from outside
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the
Runlocked from inside with the mechanical
& button on the SmartKey.
key
Tailgate emergency release

Opening/closing from outside
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
Opening outside the vehicle, use the emergency
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. release on the inside of the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
i The opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 335).

Side windows 77
You can reach the emergency release via the Side window reversing feature
cargo compartment. Fold the rear backrests
forward (Y page 240). The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
SmartKey (Y page 69). closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
Opening and closing

attention when closing a side window.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening Rwhen closing the side window again
in paneling :. manually immediately after automatic
X Turn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise. reversing
X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of This means that the reversing feature cannot
the arrow and open the tailgate. prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
Side windows proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
Important safety notes to open the side window again.
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped. Opening and closing the side
There is a risk of injury. windows
Make sure that no body parts are in close The switches for all side windows are located
proximity during the closing procedure. If on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
somebody becomes trapped, release the each door for the corresponding side window.
switch or press the switch to open the side The switches on the driver's door take
window again. precedence.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
Z
78 Side windows
Convenience opening
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions
simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Opening and closing
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
: Front left i The convenience opening feature can
; Front right only be operated using the SmartKey. The
= Rear right SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
? Rear left
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
i When the override feature for the side door handle.
windows is activated (Y page 58), the side X Press and hold the % button until the
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
side windows and the panorama roof with
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired
ignition lock. position.
X To open: press the corresponding switch. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
X To open fully: press the corresponding with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
switch beyond the point of resistance. roller sunblinds are opened first.
Automatic closing is started. X Press and hold the % button again until
X To close: pull the corresponding switch. the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
X To close fully: pull the corresponding panel is in the desired position.
switch beyond the pressure point. X To interrupt convenience opening:
Automatic closing is started. release the % button.
X To interrupt the automatic opening/
closing: press/pull the corresponding
switch again. Convenience closing feature
i If you press the switch beyond the point G WARNING
of resistance, an automatic opening/
When the convenience closing feature is
closing process is started in the
operating, parts of the body could become
corresponding direction. You can stop
trapped in the closing area of the side window
automatic operation by operating the
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
switch again.
injury.
i You can continue to operate the side Observe the complete closing procedure
windows after you switch off the engine or when the convenience closing feature is
remove the SmartKey. This function is operating. Make sure that no body parts are
available for up to five minutes or until the in close proximity during the closing
driver's or front-passenger door is opened. procedure.

Side windows 79
When you lock the vehicle, you can If the side window opens again slightly:
simultaneously: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
Rclose the side windows on the door control panel until the side
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/ window is completely closed (Y page 77).
sliding panel X Hold the switch for an additional second.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power X If the corresponding side window remains
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the closed after the button has been released,
Opening and closing

roller sunblinds. the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
i The SmartKey must be close to the
above again.
driver's door handle.
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle. Problems with the side windows
X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with G WARNING
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. If you close a side window again immediately
X Make sure that all the side windows and the after it has been blocked or reset, the side
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding window closes with increased or maximum
panel are closed. force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power closing area in the process. This poses an
tilt/sliding panel: increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
X Press and hold the & button again until Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof closing area. To stop the closing process,
with power tilt/sliding panel close. release the switch or push the switch again to
X To interrupt convenience closing: reopen the side window.
release the & button.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because it is blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window guide.
Resetting the side windows
X Remove the objects.
You must reset each side window if: X Close the side window.
Rthe side window opens again slightly after
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
being closed fully.
and you cannot see the cause. If a side
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
window is obstructed during closing and
opened or closed. reopens again slightly:
X Close all the doors.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
the corresponding switch again until the
ignition lock. side window has closed.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door The side window is closed with increased
control panel until the side window is force.
completely closed (Y page 77).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Z
80 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
If a side window is obstructed again during ! The weather can change abruptly. It could
closing and reopens again slightly: start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
the corresponding switch again until the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
side window has closed. damaged if water enters the vehicle
The side window is closed without the anti- interior.
entrapment feature. i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
Opening and closing
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
panel Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
Important safety notes eliminate these noises.
In the following section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel. Sliding sunroof reversing feature
G WARNING The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
body parts in close proximity could become blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
trapped. There is a risk of injury. the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
Make sure that no body parts are in close
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
proximity during the opening and closing
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
procedures.
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease
G WARNING
the switch immediately, or
The reversing feature does not react:
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
The opening or closing procedure will be fingers
stopped. Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
G WARNING Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
If children operate the sliding sunroof they manually immediately after automatic
could become trapped, particularly if they are reversing
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. This means that the reversing feature cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the prevent someone being trapped in these
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never situations. There is a risk of injury.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Do not allow anything to protrude from the Rduring automatic operation, push the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could switch briefly in any direction
be damaged. The closing process is stopped.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 81
Operating the sliding sunroof the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Opening and closing

Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
Overhead control panel
: To raise The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
; To open
only be opened and closed together when the
= To close/lower sliding sunroof is closed.
ignition lock. Roller sunblind reversing feature
X Make sure that the roller sunblinds are The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
open. automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
corresponding direction. closing process, the roller sunblind opens
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the again automatically. However, the automatic
point of resistance, an automatic opening/ reversing feature is only an aid and does not
closing process is started in the relieve you of the responsibility of paying
corresponding direction. You can stop attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
automatic operation by operating the G WARNING
switch again. The reversing feature does not react:
The automatic raising feature is available
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
fingers
i You can continue to operate the sliding Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again
sunroof after switching off the engine or manually immediately after automatic
removing the SmartKey from the ignition reversing
lock. This function remains active for five
This means that the reversing feature cannot
minutes or until you open a front door.
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the When closing make sure that no parts of the
sliding sunroof body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
G WARNING Rduring automatic operation, push the
When opening or closing the roller sunblind, switch briefly in any direction
parts of the body could be trapped between The closing process is stopped.
Z
82 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing X Press the 3 switch to the point of

resistance in the direction of arrow ; and
hold it until the roller sunblinds are open
about 4 in (10 cm).
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
Opening and closing
additional second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof
(Y page 81) and the roller sunblinds
Overhead control panel (Y page 82) can be fully opened and closed
: To open
again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
; To open
above again.
= To close
ignition lock. Problems with the sliding sunroof
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
G WARNING
corresponding direction.
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the malfunction or voltage supply interruption,
point of resistance, an automatic opening/ then the backing up function will malfunction
closing process is started in the or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with
corresponding direction. You can stop increased or maximum force. Parts of the
automatic operation by operating the body could be trapped in the closing area in
switch again. the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the In such or similar situations always make sure
roller sunblinds that no parts of the body are in the closing
If the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a
do not move smoothly, reset the sliding malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
sunroof and the roller sunblinds:
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the opened or closed as a result of a
ignition lock. malfunction, contact a qualified specialist
X Press the 3 switch to the point of workshop.
resistance in the direction of arrow ; and
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
hold it until the sliding sunroof has opened and you cannot see the cause. If the sliding
about 4 in (10 cm).
sunroof is obstructed during closing and
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
reopens again slightly:
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
switch down again to the point of
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 83
resistance until the sliding sunroof is

closed
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again
during closing and then reopens slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3
Opening and closing

switch down again to the point of
resistance until the sliding sunroof is
closed
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
anti-entrapment feature.
Z
84

85

Correct driver's seat position ............ 86
Seats .................................................... 87
Steering wheel .................................... 91
Mirrors ................................................. 92
Memory functions ............................... 95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

86 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information Ryou have moved the backrest to an

almost vertical position.
i This Operator's Manual describes all Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
models and all standard and optional that your thighs are gently supported.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
time of publication of the Operator's X Check whether the head restraint is
Manual. Country-specific differences are adjusted properly (Y page 89).
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
When doing so, make sure that you have
not be equipped with all features
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
described. This also applies to safety-
of your head is supported at eye level by
the center of the head restraint.

i Read the information on qualified Observe the safety guidelines on steering
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). wheel adjustment (Y page 91).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is
Correct driver's seat position adjusted properly.

Adjusting the steering wheel
(Y page 91)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 45).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 47).
The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
Observe the safety guidelines on seat Rbe routed across the middle of your
adjustment (Y page 87). shoulder
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
properly. hip joints
Manual seat adjustment (Y page 88) X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 88) mirror and the exterior mirrors
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: (Y page 92) in such a way that you have
a good view of road and traffic conditions.
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air X Vehicles with a memory function: save
bag as possible.
the seat and exterior mirror settings
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
(Y page 95).
position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Seats 87
Seats of an accident, you could slide underneath the

seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
Important safety notes injuries, for example. This poses an increased
G WARNING risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Children could become trapped if they adjust Adjust the seat properly before beginning
the seats, particularly when unattended. your journey. Always make sure that the seat
There is a risk of injury. is in the upright position.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If head restraints are not installed and

adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
G WARNING protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
in the event of an accident or when braking.
do the following while driving:
Always drive with the head restraints
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, installed. Before driving off, make sure for
steering wheel or mirrors every vehicle occupant that the center of the
Rfasten the seat belt head restraint supports the back of the head
There is a risk of an accident. at about eye level.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your G WARNING
seat belt before starting the engine. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
G WARNING seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or we strongly recommend that children be
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
thereby injured. Children in particular could Regardless of seating position, children 12
accidentally press the electrical seat years old and under must be seated and
adjustment buttons and become trapped. properly secured in an appropriately sized
There is a risk of injury. child restraint system or booster seat
While moving the seats, make sure that your recommended for the size and weight of the
hands or other body parts do not get under child. For additional information, see the
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment "Children in the vehicle" section.
system. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
G WARNING are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle or the child is not properly secured in the child
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the restraint.
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one heating, observe the following information:
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
G WARNING liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as

soon as possible.
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event switch on the seat heating. The seat
Z
88 Seats
heating should also not be used to dry Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

the seats.
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
or backwards.
see the "Interior care" section.
X Release lever : again.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
position.
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible. Backrest angle
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
not cover the seats with insulating X Turn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
Seat height
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
X Pull handle = upwards or push it down
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats repeatedly until the seat has reached the
and/or the objects could be damaged. desired height.
i The head restraints in the front and rear
Seat cushion angle
seats can be removed.1
For more information, contact a qualified Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
specialist workshop. supported.
X Turn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
i Further related subjects:
RLuggage compartment enlargement
(folding down the rear seats)
Adjusting the seats electrically
(Y page 240)
Adjusting the seats manually
: Head restraint height2

; Seat cushion angle
= Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle
1 Not on vehicles with sports seats.

2 Not available on vehicles with sports seats.

Seats 89
i You can store the seat settings using the X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
memory function (Y page 95). desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
Adjusting the head restraints restraint down to the desired position.
G WARNING Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
You could lose control of your vehicle if you head restraint
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
With this function you can adjust the distance
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
between the head restraint and the back of
protection as intended. There is an increased
the seat occupant's head.
in the event of an accident or when braking. X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint
Always drive with the head restraints forwards in the direction of the arrow until
installed. Before driving off, make sure for it engages.
every vehicle occupant that the center of the There are several notches.
head restraint supports the back of the head X To move backwards: press and hold
at about eye level. release button : and push the head
restraint backwards.
Adjusting the head restraints manually X When the head restraint is in the desired
position, release the button and make sure
Adjusting the head restraint height that the head restraint is engaged in
position.
Adjusting the height of the head

restraints electrically
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 88) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.
Z
90 Seats
Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in

order to remove the head restraint
(Y page 240).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the the stop.
desired position. X Press release catch : and pull the head
X To lower: press release catch : and push restraint out of the guides.
the head restraint down until it is in the X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
desired position. that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
Removing and installing the rear seat X Push the head restraint down until you hear
head restraints it engage in position.
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
protection as intended. There is an increased
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
in the event of an accident or when braking.
support for your back.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
The rear head restraints on the outer seats

can be removed and re-installed.
: To raise the backrest contour

; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour

Steering wheel 91
Switching the seat heating on/off Problems with the seat heating
Activating/deactivating The seat heating has switched off

prematurely or cannot be switched on. The
G WARNING vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can because too many electrical consumers are
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to switched on.
become very hot. The health of persons with X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited not need, such as the rear window
ability to react to excessively high defroster or interior lighting.
temperatures may be affected or they may

even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury. Steering wheel
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly. Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt

steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected. G WARNING
The system automatically switches down Children could injure themselves if they
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
eight minutes. injury.
The system automatically switches down When leaving the vehicle, always take the
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
minutes. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1. Adjusting the steering wheel
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position G WARNING
1 or 2 in the ignition lock. If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly vehicle is in motion, it could change position
until the desired heating level is set. unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
until all the indicator lamps go out. accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
heating may switch off. wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Z
92 Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
distance from road users traveling behind,
e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
: Release lever accident.

; To adjust the steering wheel height For this reason, always make sure of the
= To adjust the steering wheel position actual distance from the road users traveling
(fore-and-aft adjustment) behind by glancing over your shoulder.
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
Mirrors X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
Rear-view mirror mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : conditions.
forwards or back. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
after starting the vehicle if the rear window

Mirrors 93
defroster is switched on and the outside Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to automatically
10 minutes.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors is activated in the on-board computer
manually by switching on the rear window (Y page 199):
defroster. Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out outside.
electrically Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the

vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
1 or 2 in the ignition lock. into the correct position manually.
X Briefly press button :. X Vehicles with electrically folding
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are folding button (Y page 93) until you hear a
click and then the mirrors engage in
always folded out fully while driving. They
position.
could otherwise vibrate.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
i If you are driving faster than you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold (Y page 92).
in the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors only available if the vehicle is equipped with
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will the "Mirrors package".
otherwise not fold in when you select the The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
on-board computer (Y page 199). glare mode if:
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in Rthe ignition is switched on and
position 1 in the ignition lock. Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
X Briefly press button :. sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
is switched on.
Z
94 Mirrors
Parking position for the exterior Using the memory button

mirror on the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
General notes the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
The "Parking position of the exterior mirror on engage reverse gear. You can store this
the front-passenger side" function is only position. This setting can be stored using
available if the vehicle is equipped with the memory button M ?.
"Mirrors package". X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
Setting and storing the parking position ignition lock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on

Using reverse gear
the front-passenger side.
You can position the front-passenger side
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you exterior mirror. You should see the rear
engage reverse gear. You can store this wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.
position. X Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position

setting
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and ignition lock.
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
ignition lock. passenger side with the corresponding
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on button (Y page 92).
the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear.
X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.
side moves to the preset parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the side moves back to its original position:
exterior mirror. You should see the rear Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror. (15 km/h)
The parking position is stored. Rabout ten seconds after you have
i If you shift the transmission to another disengaged reverse gear

Rif you press button : for the exterior
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving mirror on the driver's side
position.

Memory functions 95
Memory functions
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 88).
G WARNING X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
When the memory function adjusts the seat, side (Y page 92).
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly X Briefly press the M memory button and
children – could become trapped. There is a then press storage position button 1, 2 or
risk of injury. 3 within three seconds.
While the memory function is making The settings are stored in the selected
adjustments, make sure that no one has any preset position. A tone sounds when the
body parts in the sweep of the seat. If settings have been completed.
somebody becomes trapped, immediately
release the memory function position button.
The adjustment process is stopped. Calling up a stored setting
G WARNING X Press and hold the relevant storage
Children could become trapped if they position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and
activate the memory function, particularly exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. i The setting procedure is interrupted as
When leaving the vehicle, always take the soon as you release the storage position
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never button.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
Z
96

97

Exterior lighting .................................. 98
Interior lighting ................................. 103
Replacing bulbs ................................. 104
Windshield wipers ............................ 111
Lights and windshield wipers

98 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting
i This Operator's Manual describes all Setting options

models and all standard and optional Exterior lighting can be set using:
equipment of your vehicle available at the Rthe light switch
time of publication of the Operator's
Rthe combination switch (Y page 100)
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe on-board computer (Y page 197)

described. This also applies to safety- Light switch
Operation
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed 1W Left-hand standing lamps
obligations. 2X Right-hand standing lamps
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
Conversion to symmetrical low beam controlled by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on BR Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country CN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents lamps)
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as The exterior lighting (except the parking/
possible before driving in these countries. standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
after returning
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey
Have the headlamps converted back to in position 0.
asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as
possible after crossing the border again.

Exterior lighting 99
Automatic headlamp mode If the engine is running and you turn the light
G WARNING switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on Low-beam headlamps
automatically if there is fog, snow or other Even if the light sensor does not detect that
causes of poor visibility due to the weather it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an headlamps switch on when the ignition is
accident. switched on and the light switch is set to the
In such situations, turn the light switch to L position. This is a particularly useful
L. function in the event of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's

position 2 or start the engine.
lighting at all times.
X Turn the light switch to L.
Ã is the favored light switch setting. The
The green L indicator lamp in the
light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient instrument cluster lights up.
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather Front fog lamps
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
In conditions where visibility is poor due to
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve
the parking lamps are switched on or off visibility as well as making it easier for other
automatically depending on the brightness road users to see you. They can be operated
of the ambient light. together with the parking lamps or together
RWith the engine running: if you have
with the parking lamps and low-beam
activated the daytime running lamps headlamps.
function via the on-board computer, the
X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn
daytime running lamps or the low-beam
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
headlamps and parking lamps are switched
2 or start the engine.
on or off automatically depending on the
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
brightness of the ambient light.
X Press the N button.
X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The green N indicator lamp in the
The daytime running lamps improve the
X To switch off the front fog lamps: press
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
the N button.
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. The green N indicator lamp in the
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from Only vehicles with front fog lamps are
a drive position to P, the daytime running equipped with the "fog lamp" function;
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after information on the fog lamp function for
three minutes. vehicles with Intelligent Light System
When the engine is running, the vehicle is (Y page 102).
stationary and in high ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, you turn on the
daytime running lamps and parking lamps.
Z
Rear fog lamp Combination switch

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of Turn signal
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the : High-beam headlamps
R button. ; Turn signal, right
The yellow R indicator lamp in the = High-beam flasher
instrument cluster goes out. ? Turn signal, left
Parking lamps X To indicate briefly: press the combination
! If the battery has been excessively switch briefly to the pressure point in the
discharged, the parking lamps or standing direction of arrow ; or ?.
lamps are automatically switched off to The corresponding turn signal flashes three
enable the next engine start. Always park times.
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit X To indicate: press the combination switch
according to legal standards. Avoid the beyond the pressure point in the direction
continuous use of the T parking lamps of arrow ; or ?.
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
High-beam headlamps
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
T.
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
The green T indicator lamp in the
position 2 or start the engine.
Standing lamps X Press the combination switch beyond the
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the pressure point in the direction of
corresponding side of the vehicle is arrow :.
illuminated. In the Ã position, the high-beam
X To switch on the standing lamps: the headlamps are only switched on when it is
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is dark and the engine is running.
in position 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).

Exterior lighting 101
The blue K indicator lamp in the only the turn signal lamp on the
instrument cluster lights up when the high- corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the hazard warning
X To switch off the high-beam lamps: press button :.
headlamps: move the combination switch The hazard warning lamps switch off
back to its normal position. automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
The blue K indicator lamp in the of over 6mph (10km/h) again after a full
instrument cluster goes out. brake application.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
it controls activation of the high-beam the ignition is switched off.
headlamps (Y page 102).

Headlamp cleaning system
High-beam flasher
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
operated five times while the lights are on and
engine.
the engine is running (Y page 111). When you
X Pull the combination switch in the direction switch off the ignition, the automatic
of arrow =. headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Hazard warning lamps

Cornering light function
The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if: The cornering light function improves the
Ran air bag is deployed illumination of the road over a wide angle in
the direction you are turning, enabling better
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
visibility in tight bends, for example. The
speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) and
cornering light function can only be activated
comes to a standstill
when the low-beam headlamps are switched
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: on.
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
Z
Active: Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
G WARNING
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel. Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
and turn the steering wheel. Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
signal or turn the steering wheel to the may fail to recognize other road users that
straight-ahead position. have lights, or may recognize them too late.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short In this or similar situations, the automatic
time, but is automatically switched off after high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
no more than three minutes. or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
Extended range fog lamps and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
You can use this function to set the

headlamps to change between low beam and
high beam automatically. The system
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
traveling in front of your vehicle, and
consequently switches the headlamps from
high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-
The extended range fog lamps reduce the beam headlamp range depending on the
glare experienced by the driver and improve distance to the other vehicle. Once the
the illumination of the edge of the road. system no longer detects any other vehicles,
Active: if you are driving at speeds below it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear The system's optical sensor is located behind
fog lamp. the windshield near the overhead control
Not active: if, following activation, you are panel.
driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)
or if you switch off the rear fog lamp.

Interior lighting 103
The high-beam headlamps are switched off

automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the lights and drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and
X To activate: activate the Adaptive the weather conditions (humidity and
Highbeam Assist function using the on- temperature).
board computer (Y page 197). If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
X Press the combination switch beyond the specialist workshop.
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
(Y page 100).
The _ indicator lamp in the Interior lighting
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam Overview of interior lighting
headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in Front overhead control panel
the instrument cluster also lights up. : p To switch the left-hand front reading
If you are driving at speeds below lamp on/off
approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other ; c To switch the front interior lighting
road users have been detected or the roads on
are adequately lit:
= v To switch the on/off
Z
104 Replacing bulbs
? | To switch the front interior lighting/ The interior light is activated for a short while
automatic interior lighting control off when the SmartKey is removed from the
A p To switch the right-hand front ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
reading lamp on/off switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
B To switch the automatic interior lighting
control on
Manual interior lighting control
X To switch the front interior lighting on:
set the switch to the c position.
X To switch the interior lighting off: set the
switch to the | position or (if the door
is closed) to the center position.
X To switch the interior lighting on/off:

press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
Interior lighting control if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Important notes X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from warning lamp button.
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
or
automatically deactivated after some time
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock. key.
The brightness of the ambient lighting may be
set using the on-board computer
(Y page 197). Replacing bulbs
Automatic interior lighting control
Xenon bulbs
X To switch on: set the switch to center
position B. G DANGER
X To switch off: set the switch to the | Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
position. an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical
The interior lighting automatically switches contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
on if you:
Never touch the parts or the electrical
Runlock the vehicle contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work
Ropen a door on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition specialist workshop.
lock.

Replacing bulbs 105
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
you can recognize this by the following: the
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
from the top to the bottom and back again type can be found in the legend.
when you start the engine. For this to be
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs

G WARNING
Halogen headlamps
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you : Turn signal lamp:3457
could burn yourself on these components. ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
There is a risk of injury. = Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W LL
Allow these components to cool down before ? Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
changing a bulb.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs

that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 105). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce Vehicles with Intelligent Light System
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Z
106 Replacing bulbs
Tail lamp (halogen headlamps) License plate lamp (vehicles with halogen
: Tail lamp/turn signal lamp/brake lamp: headlamps)
P 21 W : License plate lamp: C 5 W
; Inoperative
= Side marker lamp: P 21 W
Changing the front bulbs
? Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
A Backup lamp: W 16 W Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
You must remove the cover from the front
wheel housing before you can change the
front bulbs.
Tail lamp (Bi-Xenon headlamps)

: Turn signal lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W
; Rear fog lamp: H 21 W
= Backup lamp: W 16 W
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
X Push cover ; down.
X To install: push cover ; up.
X Turn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.

Replacing bulbs 107
Low-beam headlamps (halogen High-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps) headlamps)
G WARNING G WARNING
These bulbs are pressurized. These bulbs are pressurized.
They can explode when being changed if: They can explode when being changed if:
Rthey are still hot Rthey are still hot
Rthey hit an object when being removed Rthey hit an object when being removed
Rthey are dropped Rthey are dropped
There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of injury.

You should wear eye protection and clean You should wear eye protection and clean
gloves when you are changing a bulb. If gloves when you are changing a bulb. If

necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified
specialist workshop. specialist workshop.
X Remove the cover in the front wheel X Switch off the lights.
housing (Y page 106). X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out. and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out. pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise. it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages. clockwise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel
housing (Y page 106).
Z
108 Replacing bulbs
Parking lamps/standing lamps X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
(halogen headlamps) X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Cornering light function (Intelligent

Light System)
G WARNING
These bulbs are pressurized.
They can explode when being changed if:
Rthey are still hot
Rthey hit an object when being removed
X Switch off the lights. Rthey are dropped
X Open the hood. There is a risk of injury.

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise You should wear eye protection and clean
and pull it out. gloves when you are changing a bulb. If
X Pull out bulb holder ;. necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ;.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Open the hood.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull it out. it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.

Replacing bulbs 109
Changing the rear bulbs Tail lamps

Opening and closing the side trim Turn signal lamp/tail lamp and brake
panels lamp
You must open the side trim panel in the
cargo compartment before you can change X Open the cargo compartment.
the bulbs in the tail lamps. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 109).

Left-hand side trim panel X Press retaining lugs : simultaneously in
the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb
holder out.
Right-hand side trim panel

X To open: turn release knob : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim Bulb holder
panel ;. : Tail lamp/brake lamp3
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
; Inoperative lamps (vehicles without LEDs)
release knob : 90° in the opposite
= Side marker lamp (vehicles without LEDs)
direction to the arrow.
X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into
the holder, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the
bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
3 Vehicles with LEDs: turn signal/brake light only.
Z
110 Replacing bulbs
X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly. X Pull out connector C of the surround
The retaining lugs on the bulb holder lighting by releasing the latches.
engage audibly. X Place trim B to one side.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 109).
Backup lamp and rear fog lamp

Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp and rear fog lamp in the tailgate
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Open the tailgate.
X On the side where the bulb is to be

changed, unclip the remaining part of trim
D from the assembly using a sudden,
sharp movements, until bulb holder E is
accessible.
X In recess ? on the inside of the closing

handle, pry off and remove the upper
section of handle = with a flat and smooth
object, e.g. a screwdriver.
X Pull the lower section of handle : using a
sharp, sudden movement to remove it from
the trim and then place it to one side.
X Remove bulb holder E using both sides of

lever F.
X Reach under the right-hand side of trim

B and apply a gentle jolting force along the
entire length of the trim in order to unclip
it.

Windshield wipers 111
X Position trim B and engage it in place by

tapping it with your hand, starting from the
outside.
X Clip in the lower section of handle : again.
X Insert and engage the upper section of
handle = into lower section :.
License plate lamp
Bulb holder
X Rear fog lamp G: lightly press the

corresponding bulb into holder E, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb
holder E.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E and
turn it clockwise.
X Backup lamp H: remove the bulb from
bulb holder E.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder E.
X Re-insert bulb holder E until you hear
X Position a screwdriver on lamp lens :
engage audibly. from the outside.
X Position trim D and engage it in place by
X Lever out lamp lens : and remove it.
tapping it with your hand.
X Replace the bulb.
X Before beginning the installation, check
X Insert lamp lens : into the license plate
that all the metal clips are inserted in the
parts placed to one side: 2 clips ; in the lamp and press it in until it engages.
upper part of handle = and 5 clips A in
trim B.
Windshield wipers
X If not, remove the missing metal clips from
the metal openings in the tailgate and Switching the windshield wipers on/
insert them in the appropriate places. off
X Take trim B and connect plug connector ! Do not operate the windshield wipers
C to the surround lighting. when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
i The surround lighting only illuminates
that has collected on the windshield can
when the tailgate has been shut and
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
reopened.
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
Z
112 Windshield wipers
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the Ä position, causing the windshield
the windshield after the vehicle has been wipers to wipe more frequently.
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
other residues may be the reason for this. will no longer be wiped properly. This could
Clean the windshield using washer fluid prevent you from observing the traffic
after washing the vehicle in an automatic conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
car wash. year, ideally in spring and fall.
Switching the rear window wiper on/

off
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Combination switch
set to high sensitivity) : è Switch
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
B í Single wipe/î To wipe the 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
windshield using washer fluid 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X Turn the combination switch to the ignition lock.
corresponding position. X Turn switch : on the combination switch
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the to the corresponding position.

When the rear window wiper is switched on,
windshield becomes dirty in dry weather
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
conditions, the windshield wipers may be
activated inadvertently. This could then
damage the windshield wiper blades or
scratch the windshield. Replacing the wiper blades
For this reason, you should always switch Important safety notes
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or
G WARNING
Å position, the appropriate wiping If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
frequency is automatically set according to
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
of injury.
the rain sensor is more sensitive than in

Always switch off the windshield wipers and Installing the wiper blades
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield/
rear window.
X Position new wiper blade : with

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
recess B on lug A.
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
windshield/rear window may be damaged clips ; engage in bracket ?.
by the force of the impact. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have correctly.
the wiper blades changed at a qualified X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
specialist workshop. windshield.
Changing the windshield wiper blades

Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blades
Removing a wiper blade
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
X Press both release clips ;. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of wiper arm :.
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Z
114 Windshield wipers
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper

blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The spray nozzles are The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits
misaligned. the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Z
116

117
Useful information ............................ 118

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 118
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 123
Setting the air vents ......................... 130
Climate control

118 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information This will speed up the cooling process and

the desired vehicle interior temperature
i This Operator's Manual describes all will be reached more quickly.
models and all standard and optional i The integrated filter can filter out most
equipment of your vehicle available at the particles of dust, and completely filters out
time of publication of the Operator's pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
Manual. Country-specific differences are of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
possible. Please note that your vehicle may this reason, you should always observe the
not be equipped with all features interval for replacing the filter, which is
described. This also applies to safety- specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
related systems and functions. depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
i Read the information on qualified heavy air pollution, the interval may be
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). shorter than stated in the Maintenance
Booklet.
i It is possible that the dehumidification
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems function of the climate control system may
Important safety notes be activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle
Observe the settings recommended on the is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The automatic climate control regulates the
temperature and the humidity of the vehicle
interior and filters out undesirable
substances from the air.
Automatic climate control/dual-zone
automatic climate control is only operational
when the engine is running. Optimum
operation is only achieved with the side
windows and panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 129).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 78).

Overview of climate control systems 119
Control panel for automatic climate control
Climate control
USA only
: To set the temperature (Y page 125)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
= To set the air distribution (Y page 126)
? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
A To set the airflow (Y page 126)
B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
Canada only
: To set the temperature (Y page 125)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
= To set the air distribution (Y page 126)

? To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)

A To set the airflow (Y page 126)
B To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
Notes on using automatic climate ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
control if there are unpleasant outside odors or

when in a tunnel. The windows could
Automatic climate control otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
The following contains notes and into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
recommendations on optimum use of the RIf you change the settings of the climate
automatic climate control. control system, the climate status display

RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by appears for three seconds at the bottom of
turning control knob A clockwise to the the screen in the COMAND display. See
Climate control
desired position (except position 0). also the separate COMAND operating
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
instructions4. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control
RRecommendation for preventing
functions.
fogged up windows with low outside
temperatures or rain: switch ¯ on for ECO start/stop function
the air distribution and switch P and
O off if possible (Y page 126). During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
In air-recirculation mode, switch d off
reduced capacity. If you require the full
(Y page 129).
climate control output, you can switch off the
Set airflow control A to a setting between ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
3 and 6(Y page 126). button (Y page 138).
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
airflow control A to a setting between 3
and 6(Y page 126).
RRecommendation for a constant
vehicle interior temperature: set airflow
control A to a setting between 1 and
3(Y page 126).
RRecommendation for air distribution in
the winter: set O and
¯(Y page 126).
Recommendation for air distribution in
the summer: set P or P and
¯(Y page 126).
ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
4 Only for vehicles with "COMAND Multimedia System" optional equipment

Overview of climate control systems 121
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
USA only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 125)
; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)
= To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
? To increase the airflow (Y page 126)
A To set the air distribution (Y page 126)
B Display
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)
E To set the temperature, right (Y page 125)
F To activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 127)
G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
H To reduce the airflow (Y page 126)
I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)

Climate control
Canada only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 125)
; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)
= To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
? To increase the airflow (Y page 126)
A To set the air distribution (Y page 126)
B Display
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)
E To set the temperature, right (Y page 125)
F To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 129)
G To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
H To reduce the airflow (Y page 126)
I To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)
Notes on using dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"

climate control function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
The following contains instructions and if there are unpleasant outside odors or
recommendations to enable you to get the when in a tunnel. The windows could
most out of your automatic climate control. otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
RActivate climate control using the Ã and into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. temperature settings on the driver's side
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Operating the climate control systems 123
for the front-passenger side as well. The Dual-zone automatic climate control
indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RUse the residual heat function if you want ignition lock (Y page 135).
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior X To activate: press the Ã button.
when the ignition is switched off. The The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
residual heat function can only be activated up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
or deactivated with the ignition switched automatic mode.
off. or
X Press the ^ button.
ECO start/stop function
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO out. The previously selected settings are
start/stop function only operates at a restored.
reduced capacity. If you require the full X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
climate control output, you can switch off the The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
up.
Climate control
button (Y page 138).
i Dual-zone automatic climate control:
switch on climate control primarily using
Operating the climate control the Ã button.
systems
Switching climate control on/off
Activating/deactivating cooling with
Points to observe before use air dehumidification
When the climate control is switched off, the Points to observe before use
air supply and air circulation are also
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
switched off. The windows could fog up.
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
Therefore, switch off climate control only
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
briefly
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
Activating/deactivating
only deactivate the "Cooling with air-
Automatic climate control dehumidification" function briefly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the The cooling with air dehumidification function
ignition lock (Y page 135). is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
dehumidified according to the temperature
the desired position (except position 0) selected.
(Y page 119).
Condensation may drip from the underside of
X To switch off: turn control A counter-
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
clockwise to position 0(Y page 119). normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.

124 Operating the climate control systems
X To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Climate control

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Setting the climate control to X To switch to manual mode: press the

automatic É or Ë button.
Climate control
The automatic function is only available in or
conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate X Press the K or I button.
control. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
maintained automatically at a constant level. are deactivated.
The system automatically regulates the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution. Setting the temperature
The automatic mode functions optimally Automatic climate control
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling You can set the temperature for the entire
with air dehumidification can be deactivated. vehicle.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
dehumidification" function, the air inside the ignition lock (Y page 135).
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the X To increase/reduce: turn control :
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The clockwise or counter-clockwise
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, (Y page 119). Only change the temperature
only deactivate the "Cooling with air- setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
dehumidification" function briefly. (22 †).
ignition lock (Y page 135). Dual-zone automatic climate control
X Set the desired temperature.
Different temperatures can be set for the
X To activate: press the Ã button.
driver's and front-passenger sides.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated. ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase/reduce: turn control : or
E clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 121). Only change the temperature

setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ Setting the air distribution

(22 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
Setting the air distribution until the desired symbol appears in the
Automatic climate control display.
Air distribution settings

¯ Directs air through the defroster vents Setting the airflow
P Directs air through the center and side Automatic climate control
air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase/reduce: turn control A
i You can also activate several air clockwise or counter-clockwise
Climate control
distribution settings simultaneously. To do (Y page 119).

this, press multiple air distribution buttons.
The air is then directed through various
Dual-zone automatic climate control
vents.
Setting the air distribution ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To increase/reduce: press the K or
ignition lock (Y page 135). I button.
X Press one or more of the P, O,
¯ buttons.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up Switching the ZONE function on/off
briefly.
This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
X To activate: press the á button.
Air distribution settings The indicator lamp in the á button lights
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents up.
P Directs air through the center and side The temperature setting for the driver's
air vents side is not adopted for the front-passenger
O Directs air through the footwell air side.
vents X To deactivate: press the á button.
b Directs air through the defroster, The indicator lamp in the á button goes
center and side air vents out.
a Directs air through the defroster and The temperature setting for the driver's
footwell vents side is adopted for the front-passenger
side.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise
until they engage.

Defrosting the windshield X Press the Ã button.5

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
You can use this function to defrost the
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
automatic mode.
windshield and the side windows.
or
i You should only select the "windshield X Automatic climate control: turn
defrosting" function until the windshield is temperature control : clockwise or
clear again.
counter-clockwise (Y page 119).
Dual-zone automatic climate control:
ignition lock (Y page 135). turn temperature controls : or E
X To activate: press the ¬ button. clockwise or counter-clockwise
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights (Y page 121).
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions: MAX COOL maximum cooling
Climate control
Rhigh airflow
The MAX COOL function is only available in
Rhigh temperature vehicles for the USA.
Rair distribution to the windshield and MAX COOL is only operational when the
front side windows engine is running.
Rair-recirculation mode off X To activate: press the Ù button.
i The "windshield defrosting" function The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
automatically sets the blower output to the X To deactivate: press the Ù button
optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the again.
airflow may increase or decrease The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
automatically after the button is pressed. selected settings are restored.
i You can adjust the blower output When you activate MAX COOL, climate
manually while the "Windshield defrosting" control switches to the following functions:
function is in operation: Rmaximum cooling
RAutomatic climate control: turn airflow
Rmaximum airflow
control A clockwise or counter-
Rair-recirculation mode on
clockwise (Y page 119).
RDual-zone automatic climate control:
press the ó or ô button. Defrosting the windows
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
Windows fogged up on the inside
out. The previously selected settings are Automatic climate control
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air
deactivated.
dehumidification" function.
or
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 127).
5 3-zone automatic climate control only.

i You should only select this setting until

the windshield is clear again.
X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 127).
Windows fogged up on the outside

X Activate the windshield wipers.
Climate control
X Set the air distribution to P or O.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off
automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window defroster may switch off.
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
deactivated lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
be activated. defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates

recirculation mode automatically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in outside temperatures below
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Climate control
particular at low temperatures. Only use air-
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the Rafter approximately five minutes if the
windows from fogging up. "Cooling with air dehumidification"
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if function is deactivated
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
from outside. The air already inside the outside temperatures above
vehicle will then be recirculated. approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the with air dehumidification" function is
same for all control panels. activated
Activating/deactivating the residual
X To activate: press the e button.
heat function
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up. The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
i Air-recirculation mode is activated climate control.
automatically at high outside It is possible to make use of the residual heat
temperatures. When air-recirculation mode of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
is activated automatically, the indicator for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
lamp in the e button is not lit. has been switched off. The heating time
Outside air is added after about depends on the temperature that has been
30 minutes. set.
X To deactivate: press the e button. i The blower will run at a low speed
The indicator lamp in the e button goes regardless of the airflow setting.
out. i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.

130 Setting the air vents
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the Setting the center air vents
ignition lock or remove it (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
i Residual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
X To open the center air vent: turn the
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
adjuster in one of center air vents :
Rif the battery voltage drops
counter-clockwise.
Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated
Climate control
X To close the center air vent: turn the

adjuster in one of center air vents :
Setting the air vents
Setting the side air vents
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior, : Side window defroster vent
please observe the following notes:
; Side air vent
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves. in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in the vehicle interior. in side air vent ; clockwise until it
engages.
i You can move the adjusters for the air
vents vertically or horizontally to set the
direction of the airflow.
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.

Setting the air vents 131
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
Climate control
= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Z
132

133

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134
Driving ............................................... 134
Automatic transmission ................... 140
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 147
Parking ............................................... 149
Driving tips ........................................ 152
Driving systems ................................ 157

134 Driving
Useful information After 1,000 miles (1,500km), you can

increase the engine speed gradually and bring
i This Operator's Manual describes all the vehicle up to full speed.
models and all standard and optional i You should also observe these notes on
equipment of your vehicle available at the breaking-in if the engine or parts of the
Driving and parking
time of publication of the Operator's drive train on your vehicle have been
Manual. Country-specific differences are replaced.
not be equipped with all features i Always observe the respective speed
described. This also applies to safety- limits.
i Read the information on qualified Driving
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle G WARNING

Important safety notes pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only The operating and road safety of the vehicle
reach their optimum braking effect after is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
several hundred kilometers of driving. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Compensate for this by applying greater force stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
to the brake pedal. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The first 1,000miles (1,500 km) loose floormats.
The more you look after the engine when it is G WARNING

new, the more satisfied you will be with its
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
performance in the future.
of the pedals, e.g.:
RYou should therefore drive at varying Rshoes with thick soles
vehicle and engine speeds for the first
Rshoes with high heels
1,000 miles (1,500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full Rslippers
throttle, during this period. There is a risk of an accident.

RChange gear in good time, before the Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the usage of the pedals.
red area of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to G WARNING
brake the vehicle. If you switch off the ignition while driving,
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator safety-relevant functions are only available
pedal past the point of resistance with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
(kickdown). for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
drive in program E.
of an accident.

Driving 135
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Starting the engine
G WARNING Important safety notes

If the parking brake has not been fully G WARNING
released when driving, the parking brake can: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Driving and parking

Roverheat and cause a fire gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Rlose its hold function. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the parking brake fully before driving off. the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has G WARNING
reached operating temperature. Flammable materials introduced through
Only shift the automatic transmission to environmental influence or by animals can
the desired drive position when the vehicle ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
is stationary. parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery Carry out regular checks to make sure that
roads. You could otherwise damage the there are no flammable foreign materials in
drive train. the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
Key positions ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine.
i During a cold start, the engine runs at
higher speeds to enable the catalytic
converter to reach its operating
temperature. The sound of the engine may
change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
g To remove the SmartKey
the multifunction display.
(shift the transmission to position P) i When the transmission is in position N,
1 Power supply for some consumers, such you can also start the engine with the brake
as the windshield wipers pedal depressed.
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position Starting procedure
3 To start the engine X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock (Y page 135) and release it as
ignition lock even if it is not the correct soon as the engine is running.
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Z
136 Driving
Pulling away Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
Automatic transmission It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
i It is only possible to shift the transmission have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
from position P to the desired position if This gives you enough time to move your foot
Driving and parking
you depress the brake pedal. Only then can from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
the parking lock be deactivated. If you do and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT roll.
SELECT lever can still be moved but the X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
parking lock remains engaged. The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Pull away.
i If the transmission oil temperature is
below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 † ), you can only shift from Hill start assist will not function if:
position P when the engine is running. Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it a downhill gradient.
depressed. Rthe transmission is in position N.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
X Release the brake pedal. RESP® is malfunctioning.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Further information on holding the vehicle
The electric parking brake (Y page 150) is stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 143).
automatically released.
The red ! indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. ECO start/stop function
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Important safety notes
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
G WARNING
drop down.
If the engine is switched off automatically and
You can open the doors from the inside at
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
any time.
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
You can also deactivate the automatic There is a risk of accident and injury.
locking feature (Y page 198).
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
i Upshifts take place at higher engine the ignition and secure the vehicle against
speeds after a cold start. This helps the rolling away.
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly. General notes
Hill start assist If the ¤ symbol is shown in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
G WARNING function switches the engine off
After a short time, hill start assist will no automatically when the vehicle stops.
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll The engine starts automatically when the
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the start/stop function thereby helps you to
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start of your vehicle.
assist.

Driving 137
The stop/start function is automatically Vehicles with automatic transmission

activated each time you start the engine with If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
the SmartKey. N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
If the ECO start/stop function has been the engine automatically.
manually deactivated (Y page 138) or a
i The HOLD function can be activated if the
Driving and parking

malfunction has caused the system to be
engine has been switched off
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
automatically. It is then not necessary to
displayed.
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
Automatic engine switch-off the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
General notes automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in the
Automatic engine start
multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit General notes
green. The engine starts automatically if:
Rthe outside temperature is within the Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
comfort range. by pressing the ECO button.
Rthe engine is at normal operating Ryou engage reverse gear R.
temperature. Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
Rthe brake system requires this.
has been reached.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
deviates from the set range.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
Rthe system detects moisture on the
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
windshield when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
low.
seat belt is fastened. Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the
If conditions for automatic engine switch-off driver's door is opened.
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
not be shown. Vehicles with automatic transmission
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active The engine is started automatically if you:
when the engine has been stopped Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
automatically. activated and the transmission is in
position D or N.
i The engine can be switched off
Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
automatically a maximum of four times
Rmove the transmission out of position P.
(first stop and three subsequent stops) in
succession. Automatic engine switch-off is i Shifting the transmission to position P
possible again once the ECO symbol does not start the engine.
appears in the multifunction display.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
Z
138 Driving
again as soon as the ¤ symbol

reappears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
Driving and parking
ECO button
X To switch off: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
out.
X To switch on: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction
display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled the
¤ symbol is not shown in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.

Driving 139
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start.
Driving and parking

X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 167) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 159).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 135). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Z
140 Automatic transmission

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature display is is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
showing more than X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 ‡ (120 †). The to cool down.
coolant warning lamp X Check the coolant level (Y page 269). Observe the warning
may also be lit and a
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
warning tone may
sound.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
If the engine speed is above the idling speed steering column.
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a j Park position with parking lock
risk of an accident.
k Reverse gear
After switching off the engine, always switch
i Neutral
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the h Drive
parking brake. i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
in the transmission position display
(Y page 141) in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 141
Transmission position and drive In addition, a warning tone sounds and a

program display display message is shown.
The current transmission position and drive i Depressing the brake and pushing the
program appear in the multifunction display. DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
disengages the parking lock. The
Driving and parking

transmission is in N neutral.
At transmission fluid temperatures below
Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park
position P into another transmission
position when the engine is running.
In order to shift from park position P
: Transmission position display directly into R or D:
; Drive program display Rdepress the brake pedal and
i The arrows in the transmission position Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
display show how and into which down past the first point of resistance
transmission positions you can change
! If the engine speed is too high or the
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
! If the transmission position display in the automatic transmission directly from D to
multifunction display is not working, you R, from R to D or directly to P. The
should pull away carefully to check whether automatic transmission could otherwise be
the desired transmission position is damaged.
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program Engaging reverse gear R
E or S.
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
Engaging park position P R when the vehicle is stationary.
X
i The ECO start/stop function is not
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of arrow P. available when reverse gear is engaged.
Transmission position display P is shown in Further information on the ECO start/stop
the multifunction display. function (Y page 136).
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
i When you engage park position P, make
brake pedal.
sure that the transmission position display
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
shows P in the multifunction display.
first point of resistance.
i You can only engage park position P when
the vehicle is stationary. Shifting to neutral N
i The automatic transmission shifts into X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
park position P automatically: brake pedal.
Rif you open the driver's door while the X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
vehicle is stationary in transmission to the first point of resistance.
position D or R
If the engine has been switched off, the
Rif you open the door while traveling at
automatic transmission automatically shifts
very low speeds in transmission position to N.
D or R
Z
Remaining in neutral N Transmission positions

If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car B Park position
washes with a towing device, please observe Do not shift the transmission into
the following instructions: position P unless the vehicle is
Driving and parking
stationary (Y page 149). The

G WARNING parking lock should not be used as
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, a brake when parking. Always
they could: apply the electronic parking brake
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other in addition to the parking lock in
people or road users. order to secure the vehicle.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. If the vehicle electronics are
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. malfunctioning, the transmission
may be locked in position P.
motion if, for example, they: Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified
parking position P. C Reverse gear
Rstarting the engine. Only shift the transmission to R
There is a risk of an accident and injury. when the vehicle is stationary.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the A Neutral
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never No power is transmitted from the
leave children or animals unattended in the engine to the drive wheels.
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Releasing the brakes will allow you
reach of children.
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. push it or tow it.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
brake pedal and keep it depressed. only shift the transmission to
RShift to neutral N.
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
RRelease the brake pedal.
When you switch off the engine, the
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
automatic transmission
release it. automatically shifts into neutral N.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. 7 Drive
The automatic transmission
Engaging drive position D changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.

Changing gear Kickdown

The automatic transmission shifts to the Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
individual gears automatically when it is in X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
transmission position D. This automatic pressure point.
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Driving and parking

The automatic transmission shifts to a
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 143) lower gear depending on the engine speed.
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
Rthe road speed desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Driving tips Rocking the vehicle free

Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
gradients gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if
it has become stuck in slush or snow. The
G WARNING vehicle's engine management system limits
If the clutch overheats, the electronic the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)
management system is automatically when shifting back and forth. To shift back
deactivated. This interrupts the power and forth between transmission positions D
transmission. The vehicle may, for example, and R, move the selector lever up and down
roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of beyond the pressure point.
an accident.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator. Program selector button
The clutch may overheat if you hold the General notes

vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by The program selector button allows you to
depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch choose between drive programs with
overheats, a warning tone sounds. The Stop different driving characteristics.
Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine
Running display message appears in the
multifunction display. You will only be able to
continue your journey once the clutch has
cooled down and the display message in the
multifunction display has disappeared.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary
on uphill gradients by:
Rdepressing the brake pedal
Ractivating
Example: program selector button
the HOLD function
Rengaging the electric parking brake
Z
E Economy Comfortable, economical the automatic transmission immediately

driving shifts into the next gear down or up.
i You can only change gear with the
S Sport Sporty driving style
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
M Manual Manual gear shifting transmission is in position D.
Driving and parking
i For further information on the manual

Only change from automatic drive program drive program, see (Y page 144).
E or S to manual drive program M when the
vehicle is stationary.
X Press program selector button : Automatic drive program
repeatedly until the letter for the desired Drive program E is characterized by the
gearshift program appears in the following:
multifunction display.
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings
i The automatic transmission shifts to Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
automatic drive program E each time the the automatic transmission shifting up
engine is started. sooner
i For further information on the automatic Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
drive program, see (Y page 144). forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
Steering wheel paddle shifters stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the
following:
Rsporty engine settings
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
down) as a result of the later automatic
; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts transmission shift points
up)
In drive program M, you can change gear Manual drive program
yourself using the steering wheel paddle
shifters. Introduction
If you pull the left or right steering wheel In manual drive program M, you can change
paddle shifter when in automatic drive gear yourself by using the steering wheel
program E or S, the automatic transmission paddle shifters. For this, the transmission
shifts into drive program M for a limited time. must be in position D. The gear currently
Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,

selected and engaged is shown in the automatic transmission shifts into the
multifunction display. automatic drive program that was last
Manual drive program M differs from drive engaged, i.e. E or S. When driving on
programs E and S with regard to spontaneity, downhill gradients, the temporarily active
responsiveness and smoothness of gear manual drive program M will only be
Driving and parking

changes. deactivated if the accelerator pedal is
depressed while the vehicle is rolling
Gear Driving situations downhill.
= You can use the engine's braking
effect Upshifting
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
5 To use the braking effect of the
engine on downhill gradients and shifter (Y page 144).
for driving: The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
Ron steep mountain roads
X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol
Rin mountainous terrain
appears in the display instead of M.
Rin arduous conditions
i To prevent engine damage the automatic
4 To use the braking effect of the transmission shifts up automatically:
engine on extremely steep downhill
Rif the maximum engine speed on the
gradients and on long downhill
stretches currently engaged gear is reached and
Ryou continue to accelerate.
Switching on the manual drive program

Downshifting
Activating permanently
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
X Press the program selector button shifter (Y page 144).
(Y page 143) repeatedly until M appears in The automatic transmission shifts down to
the multifunction display. the next gear.
Manual drive program M remains active
until drive program E or S is engaged. i If you slow down or stop without shifting
down, the automatic transmission
Activating temporarily
automatically shifts down.
X Pull the right or left steering wheel paddle
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
shifter (Y page 144).
M is shown in the multifunction display. hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
Manual drive program M is temporarily transmission selects the optimum gear for
the current speed.
active. Depending on which paddle shifter
is pulled, the automatic transmission i If the engine exceeds the maximum
immediately shifts into the next gear down engine speed when shifting down, the
or up. automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
i When manual drive program M is
activated via the steering wheel paddle
shifters, the temporarily active manual
drive program M will be deactivated
automatically after a limited time, if the
driving situation permits. In this case, the
Z
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Driving and parking
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
i During kickdown, you cannot change gear
using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
i If you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Switching off the manual drive program

X Press the program selector button
(Y page 143) repeatedly until E or S
Deactivating the temporary manual drive
program
X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter until the automatic
transmission shifts into the last active
automatic drive program: E or S.
i If manual drive program M is deactivated,
the automatic transmission in automatic
drive program E or S may shift from the
current gear into a higher or lower gear.
This is dependent on the position of the
accelerator pedal, speed and load.

Refueling 147
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking

workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no X Shift the transmission to position P.
longer shifts into all of X
Switch off the engine.
the gears.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
Reverse gear can no
X Shift the transmission to position D.
longer be engaged.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Refueling clean water. Seek medical assistance

without delay.
Important safety notes RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
G WARNING assistance without delay. Do not induce
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel vomiting.
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and RImmediately change out of clothing which
explosion. has come into contact with fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine G WARNING
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
refueling. ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
G WARNING Always touch the vehicle body before opening
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
There is a risk of injury. nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
You must make sure that fuel does not come thereby discharged.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
observe the following:
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
RWash away fuel from skin immediately wrong fuel could result in damage to the
using soap and water. fuel system and the engine. The repair
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
immediately rinse them thoroughly with workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
lines drained completely.
Z
148 Refueling
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the Opening

fuel system. X Switch the engine off.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the lock.
paintwork. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
Driving and parking
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. arrow :.

Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection The fuel filler flap swings up.
system could be blocked by particles from X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
the fuel can. and remove it.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the X Insert the fuel filler cap into holder on the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic inside of fuel filler flap =.
charge could build up again. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. and refuel.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
(Y page 330). switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
Refueling fuel may leak out.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Closing
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 214).
: To open the fuel filler flap
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
; Tire pressure table
lamp may light up (Y page 231).
= To insert the fuel filler cap
For further information on warning and
? Fuel type to be used indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked see (Y page 231).
automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on
the filling pump indicates the side of the
vehicle.

Parking 149
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately
and remove it (Y page 135).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
Parking G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
G WARNING example:
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Rreleasing the parking brake
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they the parking position P
could ignite. There is a risk of fire. Rstarting the engine.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
They could also operate the vehicle's
materials come into contact with parts of the
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not
injury.
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly

against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
Z
150 Parking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against i The automatic transmission shifts to P
rolling away unintentionally: automatically if you:
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
Rthe transmission must be in position P and and remove the SmartKey from the
the transmission position display must ignition lock or
Driving and parking
show P. Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey

Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the and open a front door.
ignition lock. If you attempt to turn off the engine when the
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front selector lever is not in position P:
wheels must be turned towards the curb. Ra message appears in the multifunction
display
Ra warning signal sounds
Switching off the engine
Electric parking brake
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to General notes
neutral position N when you switch off the
G WARNING
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
After switching off the engine, always switch example:
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
Rreleasing the parking brake
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Vehicles with automatic transmission Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's

X Apply the electric parking brake.
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ignition lock and remove it. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The immobilizer is activated. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
i If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
If you then open one of the front doors or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to P.
If you shift the automatic transmission to
N before switching off the engine, the
automatic transmission remains in N even
if a door is opened.
i The electric parking brake performs a
function test at regular intervals while the

Parking 151
engine is switched off. The sounds that can Releasing automatically

be heard while this is occurring are normal.
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is
automatically released if all of the following
Applying/releasing manually conditions are met:
Driving and parking

Applying Rthe engine is running.
X Push handle :. Rthe transmission is in position D or R.
When the electric parking brake is Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
engaged, the ! red indicator lamp lights Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
up in the instrument cluster. If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate
i The electric parking brake can also be must be closed.
applied when the SmartKey is removed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
Releasing release the electric parking brake:
X Pull handle :.
Rthe driver's door is closed.
The red ! indicator lamp in the
Ryou have shifted out of transmission
position P or you have previously driven
i You can only release the electric parking faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
brake when the key is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock. Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
Applying automatically emergency by using the electric parking
The electric parking brake is applied brake.
automatically: X While driving, push handle : of the electric
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a parking brake (Y page 150).
standstill or
i The vehicle is braked for as long as
Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
handle : of the electric parking brake is
stationary
pressed. The longer electric parking brake
In addition, at least one of the following handle : is depressed, the greater the
conditions must be fulfilled: braking force.
Rthe engine is switched off. During braking:
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt
Ra warning tone sounds
is not fastened.
Rthe Release Park. Brake message
Rthere is a system malfunction.
appears
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
instrument cluster flashes
period.
When the vehicle has been braked to a
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument standstill, the electric parking brake is
cluster lights up. engaged.
i The electric parking brake is not
automatically engaged if the engine is
switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
Z
152 Driving tips
Parking the vehicle for a long period unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
exhaustive discharging.
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
Driving and parking
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than per second.
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use. Drive sensibly – save fuel
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
seek advice.
RThe tires should always be inflated to the
i You can obtain information about trickle recommended tire pressure.
chargers from a qualified specialist RRemove unnecessary loads.
workshop.
RRemove roof racks when they are not
needed.
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Driving tips
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes RHave all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or by the service
G WARNING interval display.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, Fuel consumption also increases when
safety-relevant functions are only available driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, and in hilly terrain.
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably Drinking and driving
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. G WARNING
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
If you operate mobile communication affect your reflexes, perceptions and
equipment while driving, you will be judgment.
distracted from traffic conditions. You could The possibility of a serious or even fatal
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk accident are greatly increased when you drink
of an accident. or take drugs and drive.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
is stationary. anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some Emission control
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile phone while driving a vehicle. G WARNING
If you make a call while driving, always use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
when the traffic situation permits. If you are these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

Driving tips 153
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave percentage indicates a more economical
the engine running in enclosed spaces driving style.
without sufficient ventilation. The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
Certain engine systems are designed to keep count in the ECO display does not indicate a
Driving and parking

the level of poisonous components in exhaust fixed consumption figure.
fumes within legal limits. Apart from driving style, consumption is
These systems only work at peak efficiency if dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
they are serviced exactly in accordance with RLoad
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
RTire pressure
reason, only have work on the engine carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- RCold start
Benz technicians. RChoice of route
The engine settings must not be changed RElectrical consumers switched on
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all These factors are not taken into
specific service work must be carried out at consideration by the ECO display.
regular intervals and in accordance with the
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
out using the following three categories:
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
RAcceleration (evaluation of all
acceleration processes)
ECO display - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
The ECO display gives you information on how
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
economical your driving style is. The ECO
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
display assists you in achieving the optimum
driving style in terms of consumption, taking at all times)
the actual and selected conditions into - The bar fills up: constant speed and
consideration. Your driving style can avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
significantly influence the vehicle's and deceleration
consumption. - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes)
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
Example: ECO display
The ECO display consists of three bars: i An economical driving style specially
requires driving at moderate engine
RAcceleration
speeds.
RConstant
To achieve a higher value in the categories
RCoasting Acceleration and Constant:
The percent value is the average value of the Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
three bars. The three bars and the mean value Rdrive in drive program E.
begin at the value of 50%. A higher
Z
154 Driving tips
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. the last active automatic drive program E
on the highway, only the bar for Constant or S. The automatic transmission may shift
will change. to a higher gear. This can reduce the
engine's braking effect.
i The ECO display summaries the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
Driving and parking
to its completion. For this reason, the bars

Heavy and light loads
change dynamically at the beginning of the G WARNING
journey. On longer journeys, there are If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, driving, the braking system can overheat. This
carry out a manual reset. increases the stopping distance and can even
Further information on the ECO display cause the braking system to fail. There is a
(Y page 190). risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
Brakes pedal at the same time.
Important safety notes ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
G WARNING results in excessive and premature wear to
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in the brake pads.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Drive on for a short while. This allows the
accidents. airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
Downhill gradients without braking, there may be a delayed
! On long and steep gradients, you must reaction from the brakes when braking for the
first time. This may also occur after the
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to
vehicle has been washed or driven through
a lower gear in good time. This allows you
deep water.
to take advantage of the engine's braking
effect. For this, you need to have selected You have to depress the brake pedal more
manual drive program M. This helps you to firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
avoid overheating the brakes and wearing vehicle in front.
them out excessively. After driving on a wet road or having the
When you take advantage of the engine's vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn attention to the traffic conditions. This will
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
surface. This could cause damage to the more quickly and protecting them against
drive train. This type of damage is not corrosion.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Limited braking performance on salt-
i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal treated roads
on downhill gradients while the manual
drive program M is temporarily activated: If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
the automatic transmission may switch to residue may form on the brake discs and

Driving tips 155
brake pads. This can result in a significantly qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
longer braking distance. qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
salt residue. Make sure that you do not replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
endanger other road users when doing so. If the brake system has only been subject to
Driving and parking

RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the moderate loads, you should test the
beginning and end of a journey. functionality of your brakes at regular
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle intervals.
ahead. You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 59).
Servicing the brakes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in have brake pads/linings installed on your
vehicle which have been approved for
the instrument cluster and you hear a
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
warning tone while the engine is running,
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
the brake fluid level may be too low.
pads/linings which have not been approved
Observe additional warning messages in
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
of an equivalent quality could affect your
The brake fluid level may be too low due to vehicle's operating safety.
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
Have the brake system checked use brake fluid that has been specially
immediately. This work should be carried approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
out at a qualified specialist workshop. or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
! A function or performance test should standard. Brake fluid which has not been
only be carried out on a 2-axle approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
dynamometer. If you are planning to have which is not of an equivalent quality could
the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, affect your vehicle's operating safety.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain further information first. Checking brake lining thickness
Otherwise, you could damage the drive
You can measure the break pad/lining
train or the brake system.
thickness using a test gauge. Color-coding
! As the ESP® system operates (green or red) on the test gauge allows you to
automatically, the engine and the ignition determine whether the brake pad/lining
must be switched off (the SmartKey must thickness is still sufficient. The test gauge is
be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if: in the vehicle document wallet in the glove
Rthe
box.
electric parking brake is tested on a
brake dynamometer (for a maximum of
ten seconds)
Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP®
may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
Z
156 Driving tips
X Hold test gauge A vertically on brake

disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto
brake disc :.
X Check which color field ? the arrow on
measuring pin ; is pointing to.
Driving and parking
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is

sufficient.
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i To avoid an inaccurate measurement:
Rmake sure you position the wheels
suitably
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess
Front wheel in the brake disc
Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or

in conditions in which hydroplaning may
occur, you must drive in the following
manner:
Rlower your speed.
Rear wheel Ravoid ruts.
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable Rbrake carefully.
position so that you can attach test gauge
A. Driving on flooded roads
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
(Y page 149).
Check the depth of any water before driving
X Move the selector lever to position P.
through it. Drive slowly through standing
X Switch off the engine. water. Otherwise, water may enter the
X Place test gauge A between the wheel's vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
spokes on brake pad/lining =. This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
can cause engine damage.

Driving systems 157
Winter driving If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be

stopped when moving at low speed:
General notes
X Shift the transmission to position N.
G WARNING Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
Driving and parking

an attempt to increase the engine's braking and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
There is an increased danger of skidding and The outside temperature indicator is not
accidents. designed to serve as an ice-warning device
Do not shift down for additional engine and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
braking on a slippery road surface. Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
G DANGER Indicated temperatures just above the
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate freezing point do not guarantee that the road
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle should pay special attention to road
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of conditions when temperatures are around
fatal injury. freezing point.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating i For more information on driving with
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area snow chains, see (Y page 301).
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not Driving systems
facing into the wind.
Cruise control
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Important safety notes
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
section (Y page 300). control can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving with summer tires Cruise control cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
control is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for
Slippery road surfaces staying in your lane.
G WARNING Do not use cruise control:
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
an attempt to increase the engine's braking allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
There is an increased danger of skidding and Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accidents. accelerating could cause the drive wheels
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Z
158 Driving systems
to lose traction and the vehicle could then When you activate cruise control, the stored
skid speed is shown in the multifunction display
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, for five seconds.
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Activation conditions
Driving and parking
driver of the speed stored. To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
General notes Rthe electric parking brake must be
Cruise control maintains a constant road released.
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order Ryou are driving faster than
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and 20 mph(30 km/h).
steep downhill gradients, especially if the RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
good time. For this, you will need to have
selected manual drive program the selector lever must be in position D.
M(Y page 144). By doing so, you will make
use of the braking effect of the engine, This Storing, maintaining and calling up a
relieves the load on the brake system and speed
prevents the brakes from overheating and
Storing and maintaining the current
wearing too quickly.
speed
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
You can store the current speed if you are
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
driving faster than 20 mph (30km/h).
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
(30 km/h). speed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever
Cruise control lever up : or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
: To activate or increase speed Storing the current speed or calling up the
; To activate or reduce speed last stored speed
= To deactivate cruise control G WARNING
? To activate at the current speed/last If you call up the stored speed and it differs
stored speed from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate

Driving systems 159
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an Deactivating cruise control

accident. There are several ways to deactivate cruise
Pay attention to the road and traffic control:
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
Driving and parking

forwards =.
desired speed again.
or
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards X Brake.
you ?.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake.
pedal.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the (30 km/h).
speed of the vehicle to the previously RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
stored speed. Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving.
Setting a speed If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to Control Off message in the multifunction
the speed set. display for approximately five seconds.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a i When you switch off the engine, the last
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. speed stored is cleared.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
DISTRONIC PLUS
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point. Important safety notes
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed G WARNING
stored is increased or reduced. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph Rpeople or animals
increments (10 km/h increments): Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
briefly press the cruise control lever stopped or parked vehicles
up : or down ; to the pressure point. Roncoming and crossing traffic
Every time the cruise control lever is As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
pressed up : or down ; the last speed warnings nor intervene in such situations.
stored is increased or reduced. There is a risk of an accident.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you Always pay careful attention to the traffic
depress the accelerator pedal. For situation and be ready to brake.
example, if you accelerate briefly to
overtake, cruise control adjusts the G WARNING
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
after you have finished overtaking. identify other road users and complex traffic
situations.
Z
160 Driving systems
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: to lose traction and the vehicle could then
Rgive
skid
an unnecessary warning and then
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
Driving and parking
Raccelerate unexpectedly
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
There is a risk of an accident. vehicles driving on a different line.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to In particular, the detection of obstacles can
brake, in particular when warned to do so by be impaired if:
DISTRONIC PLUS.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
G WARNING covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this Rinterference by other radar sources
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk parking garages
of an accident. If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
try to take evasive action. unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
stored speed.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function This speed may:
is activated, the vehicle brakes
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate or an exit lane
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
the following or other similar situations: lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
Rwhen towing the vehicle
hand lane
Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
Rin the car wash
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
If you fail to adapt your driving style, lane
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
of accident nor override the laws of physics. driver of the speed stored.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good automatically helps you maintain the
time and for staying in your lane. distance to the vehicle detected in front.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
On long and steep downhill gradients,
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
especially if the vehicle is laden, you must
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
select a low gear in good time. For this, you
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
will need to have selected manual drive
accelerating could cause the drive wheels program M(Y page 154). By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and

Driving systems 161
prevents the brakes from overheating and 2. this device must accept any interference
wearing too quickly. received, including interference that may
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, cause undesired operation of the device.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. It Removal, tampering, or altering of the
maintains the preset distance to the vehicle device will void any warranties, and is not
Driving and parking

in front. permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk in any non-approved way.
of a collision, you will be warned visually and Any unauthorized modification to this
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot device could void the user's authority to
prevent a collision without your intervention. operate the equipment.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in Cruise control lever
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be:
Ractivated (Y page 199)
Roperational
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically

deactivated if:
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
: To store the current speed or a higher
(25 km/h) and there is no longer a vehicle speed
in front or ; To store the current speed or a lower
Rthe vehicle in front is no longer detected speed
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise ? To store the current speed or calling up
control in the speed range between 20 mph the last stored speed
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If a
A To set the specified minimum distance
vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h). Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,
maintaining and calling up a speed
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients. Activation conditions
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the
it can resemble the radar detectors of the following activation conditions must be
responsible authorities. You can refer to the fulfilled:
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
questions are asked about this.
to two minutes after pulling away before
i This device complies with RSS-210 of DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Rthe electric parking brake must be
the following two conditions: released.
1. This device may not cause harmful RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
interference, and
Z
162 Driving systems
Rthe transmission must be in position D. has been detected. It is therefore helpful to

Rthe driver's door must be closed when you have the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be activated in the multifunction display
fastened. (Y page 194).
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors XPress the cruise control lever repeatedly
Driving and parking
must be closed. up : or down ; until the desired speed

Rthe vehicle must not skid. is set.
i You can use the cruise control lever to set
Activating
the stored speed and the control on the
To activate while driving: when driving at cruise control lever to set the specified
speeds below 14 mph (20 km/h), you can minimum distance (Y page 165).
only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle
in front has been detected and is shown in the
multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is
no longer detected and displayed,
DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone
sounds.
X Briefly pull the cruise control level towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set. DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer
X Remove your foot from the accelerator When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
pedal. two segments ; in the set speed range light
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the up.
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired i For design reasons, the speed displayed
stored speed.
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
i If you do not fully release the accelerator the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive
message appears in the multifunction If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
display. The set distance to a slower- segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
moving vehicle in front will then not be front : and stored speed = light up.
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To activate when driving towards a
stationary vehicle: if the vehicle in front is
stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if your vehicle is also stationary.
XBriefly pull the cruise control level towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
under 14 mph (20 km/h) if a vehicle in front

Driving systems 163
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have

selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
Driving and parking

prevent a collision without your intervention.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance from the
vehicle in front, or take evasive action,
Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activated
in the multifunction display provided it is safe to do so.
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
; Own vehicle
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
= Specified minimum distance to the stored.
vehicle in front; adjustable
? Vehicle in front, if detected Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of the
PLUS supports you when:
on-board computer, you can select the
distance display. Ryou are driving faster than 40mph
X Select the Distance Display function (60 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
using the on-board computer
(Y page 194). distance to a vehicle in front
i You will see the stored speed for about Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
PLUS. of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
Driving
is accelerated. Acceleration will be
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. or if the distance between your vehicle and
Pulling away the vehicle in front becomes too small.
X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
your foot from the brake pedal. monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
(Y page 161) towards you. drive vehicles.
or Stopping
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its G WARNING
speed to that of the vehicle in front. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control. the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
Z
164 Driving systems
vehicle occupant or from outside the Storing the current speed or calling up the
vehicle. last stored speed
Rthe electrical system in the engine G WARNING
compartment, the battery or the fuses have If you call up the stored speed and it differs
been tampered with. from the current speed, the vehicle
Driving and parking
Rthe battery is disconnected. accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know

Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
There is a risk of an accident. accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Pay attention to the road and traffic
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle conditions before calling up the stored speed.
against rolling away. If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever
(Y page 165).
(Y page 161) towards you.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary. pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
time it is activated, the current speed is
stationary and you do not need to depress the
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
brake.
speed to the previously stored value.
i After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service Setting a speed
brake.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
i Depending on the specified minimum until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
distance, your vehicle will come to a the speed set.
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the control on the
cruise control lever.
The electric parking brake automatically
secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is
activated and:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO : To store the current speed or a higher
start/stop function. speed
Ra system malfunction occurs.
; To store the current speed or a lower
Rthe power supply is not sufficient. speed
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
may be shifted into position P automatically.

Driving systems 165
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
Driving and parking

down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
increments (10 km/h increments): X To increase: turn control = in
briefly press the cruise control lever direction ;.
up : or down ; to the pressure point. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
Every time the cruise control lever is distance between your vehicle and the
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed vehicle in front.
stored is increased or reduced. X To decrease: turn control = in
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you direction :.

depress the accelerator pedal. If you DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS distance between your vehicle and the
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last vehicle in front.
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Setting the specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 163).
i Make sure that you maintain the
There are several ways to deactivate
minimum distance to the vehicle in front as DISTRONIC PLUS:
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary. X Briefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
Z
166 Driving systems
i The last speed stored remains stored until X Select the Distance Display function
you switch off the engine. using the on-board computer
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically (Y page 194).
deactivated if:
Ryou
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
engage the electric parking brake or if
Driving and parking
the vehicle is automatically secured with General notes

the electric parking brake
The following contains descriptions of certain
Ryou are driving slower than 7 mph
road and traffic conditions in which you must
(10km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, be particularly attentive. In such situations,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
detected deactivated.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of the
on-board computer, you can select the The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
distance display. vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS is

deactivated
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
the vehicle in front traveling on a different line. The distance to
= Specified minimum distance to the the vehicle in front will be too short.
vehicle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle

Driving systems 167
Other vehicles changing lanes example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that
are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating
DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the voltage supply.
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
Obstructions and stationary vehicles pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for

obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
Z
168 Driving systems
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Activating the HOLD function

automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Driving and parking
the following or other similar situations:

Rin the car wash
X Make sure that the activation conditions
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 168).
are met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
General notes
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the until : appears in the multifunction
following situations:
display.
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep The HOLD function is activated. You can
slopes release the brake pedal.
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
Rwhen waiting in traffic
time does not activate the HOLD function,
The vehicle is kept stationary without the wait briefly and then try again.
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD Deactivating the HOLD function
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away. The HOLD function is deactivated
automatically if:
Activation conditions Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
transmission: only when the transmission
You can activate the HOLD function if:
is in position D or R.
Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles
Rthe engine is running or if it has been with automatic transmission.
automatically switched off by the ECO Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
start/stop function certain amount of pressure until :
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
disappears from the multifunction display.
is fastened Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
Rthe electric parking brake is released
parking brake.
Rthe transmission position D, R or N is Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
engaged while driving a vehicle with an
automatic transmission i After a time, the electric parking brake
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.

Driving systems 169
The electronic parking brake secures the PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is you:
activated and: Rswitch on the ignition
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
seat belt is unfastened. Rrelease the electric parking brake
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
automatically switched off by the ECO 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
start/stop function. speeds.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission and four sensors in the rear bumper.
may be shifted into position P automatically.
Range of the sensors
PARKTRONIC General notes

PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
Important safety notes consideration that are:
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,
replacement for your attention to your animals or objects
immediate surroundings. You are always Rabove the detection range, e.g.
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
and exiting a parking space. When
loading ramps.
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. side (example)
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with Side view
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
Z
170 Driving systems
on the dashboard above the center air vents.

The warning display for the rear area is
located on the headliner in the rear
compartment.
Driving and parking
Top view
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them Warning display for the front area
(Y page 275). : Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
Front sensors
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
Center Approx. 40in (approx. vehicle
100cm) = Segments showing operational readiness
Corners Approx. 24in (approx. The warning display for each side of the
60cm) vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
Rear sensors yellow segments showing operational
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. readiness = light up.
120 cm) The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
Corners Approx. 32in (approx. determine which warning display is active
80cm) when the engine is running.
Minimum distance Transmission Warning display
position
Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
D Front area activated
Corners Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
If there is an obstacle within this range, the is rolling activated
relevant warning displays light up and a backwards
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
P No areas activated
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
Warning displays approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located

Driving systems 171
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
Driving and parking

warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Indicator lamp
; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
Z
172 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20 seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 275).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
approximately ultrasound waves.
20seconds.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist cancel the Active Parking Assist parking

procedure.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
a replacement for your attention to your obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
immediate surroundings. You are always a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking the wheels or tires.
and exiting a parking space. When Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking spaces which are not suitable for
parking space, make sure that there are no parking, for example:
persons, animals or objects in the area in Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
which you are maneuvering.
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
G WARNING Ron unsuitable surfaces
The vehicle swings out when parking and in Parking tips:
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the
This could result in a collision with another
road user. There is a risk of an accident. parking space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown
Pay attention to other road users when
parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or or partially occupied by trailer drawbars
might be identified incorrectly or not at all.

Driving systems 173
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking

G WARNING
space being measured inaccurately. If there are objects above the detection range,
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
(Y page 170) warning messages during the You may cause a collision as a result. There is
parking procedure. a risk of an accident.
Driving and parking

RYou can intervene in the steering procedure If there are objects above the detection range,
to correct it at any time. Active Parking stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes Active Parking Assist is automatically
from your vehicle, you should not use activated when driving forwards. The system
Active Parking Assist. is operational at speeds of up to
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
chains are installed. operation, the system independently locates
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
and measures parking spaces on both sides
of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below
always correct. This has a direct influence
19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking
on the parking characteristics of the
symbol as a status indicator in the instrument
vehicle.
cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only
displays parking spaces on the front-
General notes passenger side. Parking spaces on the
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to signal on the driver's side is activated. To park
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. on the driver's side, you must leave the
A suitable parking space is indicated by the driver's side turn signal switched on. This
parking symbol. Active steering intervention must remain switched on until you
can assist you during parking. acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist
You may also use PARKTRONIC by pressing the a button on the
(Y page 169). When PARKTRONIC is switched multifunction steering wheel.
off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. When a parking space has been detected, an
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: arrow towards the right or the left also
appears.
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected Example: detected parking space for a vehicle with
automatic transmission
when the parking space is measured. These
: Detected parking space on the left
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging ; Parking symbol
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods = Detected parking space on the right
vehicles. In some circumstances, Active
Parking Assist may therefore guide you into
the parking space too early.
Z
174 Driving systems
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking X To cancel the procedure: press the
spaces: % button on the multifunction steering
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel wheel or pull away.
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide or
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than X To park using Active Parking Assist:
Driving and parking
your vehicle press the a button on the multifunction

A parking space is displayed while you are steering wheel.
driving past it, and until you are The Park Assist Active Accelerate
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Parking
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
G WARNING X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by at all times. Do not exceed a maximum
intervening actively in the steering. If you do speed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h)
not brake there is a risk of an accident. when backing up. Otherwise Active Parking
Always apply the brakes yourself when Assist will be canceled.
maneuvering and parking. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
the best parking results by backing up as
i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
far as possible. When doing so, also
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
during the parking process. You are
responsible for braking in good time. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Active Parking Assist does not support you
Maneuvering may be required in tight
with parking spaces parallel to the direction
parking spaces.
of travel if:
Rthe
The Park Assist Active Select D
parking space is on a curb
Observe Surroundings message appears in
Rthe parking space is apparently blocked,
for example by foliage or grass paving
X Shift the transmission to position D while
blocks
the vehicle is stationary.
Rthe range of movement is too small
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
the other direction.
obstacle which is not clearly defined such
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
as a tree or a trailer
and Brake Observe Surroundings
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space message appears in the multifunction
symbol shows the desired parking space in display.
the instrument cluster. i You will achieve the best results by
X Shift the transmission to position R. waiting for the steering procedure to
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: complete before pulling away.
% message appears in the multifunction
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
display.
times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the

Driving systems 175
The Park Assist Active Select R to the starting position in the parking
Observe Surroundings message appears in space.
the multifunction display. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 24 in
X Further transmission shifts may be (0.60 m) must be available.
necessary. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
Driving and parking

As soon as the parking procedure is exiting a parking space if you have parked the
complete, the Park Assist Finished vehicle using Active Parking Assist.
message appears in the multifunction X Start the engine.
display.
X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing
Active Parking Assist is then deactivated. the street.
PARKTRONIC is still available.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Maneuver if necessary.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
X Always observe the warning messages % message appears in the multifunction
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 170). display.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure: press the
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the % button on the multifunction steering
parking space after parking is dependent wheel or pull away.
on various factors. These include the or
position and shape of the vehicles parked X To exit a parking space using Active
in front and behind it and the conditions of Parking Assist: press the a button on
the location. It may be the case that Active the multifunction steering wheel.
Parking Assist guides you too far into a The Park Assist Active Accelerate
parking space, or not far enough into it. In and Brake Observe Surroundings
some cases, it may also lead you across or message appears in the multifunction
onto the curb. If necessary, you should display.
cancel the parking procedure with Active X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Parking Assist.
X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
RYou can also engage forward gear
ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed
prematurely. The vehicle redirects and a maximum speed of approximately
does not drive as far into the parking space. 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking
Should a gear be changed too early, the space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will
parking procedure will be canceled. A be canceled.
sensible parking position can no longer be
X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the
achieved from this position.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
Exiting a parking space
required while the vehicle is stationary.
In order that Active Parking Assist can Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
support you when you exit the parking space: the other direction. The Park Assist
Rthe border of the parking space must not Active Accelerate and Brake
be too low. Observe Surroundings message appears
Rthe border of the parking space must not in the multifunction display.
be too wide. The system maneuvers the i You will achieve the best results by
vehicle into a position at a maximum of 45° waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
Z
176 Driving systems
If you back up after activation, the steering A warning tone sounds. The parking space
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead symbol disappears and the multifunction
position. display shows the Park Assist Canceled
X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being message.
ready to brake at all times. If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
Driving and parking
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the steer again yourself.

continuous warning tone, if not before. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several accelerator again.
times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space Rear view camera
completely, the steering wheel is moved to
the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone Important safety notes
and the Park Assist Finished message The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
appears in the multifunction display. You will a replacement for your attention to your
then have to steer and merge into traffic on immediate surroundings. You are always
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
Canceling Active Parking Assist sure that there are no persons, animals or
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any objects in the area in which you are
time. maneuvering.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction Under the following circumstances, the rear
steering wheel or steer yourself. view camera will not function, or will function
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at in a limited manner:
once. The Park Assist Canceled Rthe tailgate is open
message appears in the multifunction Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
display. Rat night or in very dark places
or Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
center console (Y page 171). lighting (the display may flicker)
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
The Park Assist Canceled message
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Active Parking Assist is canceled Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
automatically if:
this event, have the camera position and
Ryou engage the electric parking brake. setting checked at a qualified specialist
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no workshop.
longer possible.
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.

Driving systems 177
General notes To deactivate: the rear view camera is

deactivated if you:
Rselect transmission position P (vehicles
with automatic transmission)
Rdrive forward ten meters
Driving and parking

Rshift the transmission from R to another
position (after 15 seconds)
Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph
(10km/h)
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display

Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle. The rear view camera may show a distorted
The rear view camera extends, when it is view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
activated. not at all. The rear view camera does not show
The rear view camera is an optical parking and objects in the following positions:
maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show Rvery close to the rear bumper
the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/ Runder the rear bumper
COMAND display. Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a handle
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
i The text of messages shown in the be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
COMAND display depends on the language
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND Rthe drawbar of a trailer
display. Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Activating/deactivating the rear view Ra slanted post
camera
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey Approach objects no further than the
is in position 2 in the ignition lock. bottom-most guideline.
X Make sure that in the audio system/
COMAND, the "Activation by R gear"
function is selected; see the separate
operating instructions for the audio
system/COMAND.
X Engage reverse gear.
Guide lines are used to show the area
behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND
display.
Z
178 Driving systems
The lanes and guide lines are only displayed

if you have engaged reverse gear.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving and parking
Lanes
: White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
; Yellow lane marking tires at current Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC
steering wheel angle, vehicle width to the and COMAND
outer side of the wheels (dynamic) : Front warning display
= Red guide line for the vehicle width ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
including the exterior mirrors, for current operational readiness indicator
steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Rear warning display
? Bumper
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and
COMAND: if PARKTRONIC is operational
(Y page 169), an additional operational
readiness indicator will appear in COMAND
display ;.If the PARKTRONIC warning
displays are active or light up, warning
displays : and = are also active or light up
correspondingly in the COMAND display.
Reverse parking function

X Make sure that the rear view camera is
Guide lines activated and the "Reverse parking"
? Bumper function is selected; see the separate
A Red guide line at a distance of operating instructions for the audio
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the system/COMAND.
rear of the vehicle The lane and the guide lines are shown.
B Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
D Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle

Driving systems 179
Backing up straight into a parking space

without turning the steering wheel
Driving and parking

Turning the steering wheel
: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
: White lane with steering wheel straight will take with the steering wheel in its
current position
; Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear ; Parking space marking
of the vehicle X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
= Red guide line at a distance of steering wheel in the direction of the
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the parking space until the red lane reaches
rear of the vehicle parking space marking ;.
X With the help of white lane :, check X Keep the steering wheel in that position
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking and back up carefully.
space.
X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully
reverse until you reach the end position.
Red guide line = is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its
current position
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly
in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as
possible.
Z
180 Driving systems
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical

indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
Driving and parking

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
Driving to the final position substitute for a well-rested and attentive
: White lane at current steering wheel angle driver.
; Parking space marking ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
X Turn the steering wheel to the center the following criteria into account:
position while the vehicle is stationary.
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
: Red guide line at a distance of
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the
acceleration
rear of the vehicle
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
; White lane with steering wheel straight
than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
= End of parking space 112 mph (180 km/h)
X Back up carefully until you have reached Rif you are currently using COMAND or
the final position. making a telephone call with it
Red guide line : is then at end of parking Rif the time has been set incorrectly
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in Rin active driving situations, such as when
the parking space. you change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).

Driving systems 181
Warning and display messages in the Lane Tracking package

multifunction display
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 181) and Lane Keeping
Driving and parking

Assist (Y page 183).
Blind Spot Assist
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- Important safety notes

board computer (Y page 195). G WARNING
Symbol : appears in the multifunction Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
display. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not placing them in the blind spot area
warn you until at least 20 minutes after Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a
your journey has begun. You then hear an speed difference of more than 6.8 mph
intermittent warning tone twice and the (11 km/h)
Attention Assist: Drowsiness
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
Detected message appears in the
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
X If necessary, take a break.
Always observe the traffic conditions
X Press the a button to confirm the
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
do not take a break, you will be warned again attentive driving.
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The i USA only:
precondition for this is that
This device has been approved by the FCC
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
concentration.
radar system only. Removing, tampering
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you with, or altering the device will void any
continue your journey and starts assessing warranties, and is not permitted by the
your tiredness again if: FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Ryou switch off the engine. any non-approved way.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the Any unauthorized modification to this
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or device could void the user’s authority to
to take a break. operate the equipment.
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
Z
182 Driving systems
monitored area. If you then switch on the For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar
corresponding turn signal to change lanes, sensors in the rear bumper.
you will also receive a visual and audible If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Driving and parking
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving in the middle of their lane. This may
driving, the radar sensor system must be: be the case if the vehicles are driving on the
Ractivated(Y page 199) inner side of their lane.
Roperational Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
Monitoring range of the sensors driving close to crash barriers or similar
In particular, the detection of obstacles can solid lane borders.
be impaired if: Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
covering the sensors trucks, for a prolonged time.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
rain or snow integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice
motorbike or bicycle or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. For
Rthe road has very wide lanes example, the radar sensors must not be
Rthe road has narrow lanes
covered by bicycle racks or overhanging
loads. Following a severe impact or in the
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
event of damage to the bumpers, have the
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders function of the radar sensors checked at a
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot
indicated. Assist may otherwise not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving systems 183
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the you before you leave your lane
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist unintentionally.
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
Driving and parking

20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
: Lane Keeping Assist camera
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active. If you select km on the on-board computer in
The brightness of the indicator/warning the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
lamps is adjusted automatically according to function (Y page 196), Lane Keeping Assist
the ambient light. is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
miles display unit is selected, the assistance
Collision warning range begins at 40 mph.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the Important safety notes
corresponding turn signal, a double warning G WARNING
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected recognize lane markings.
are indicated by the flashing of red warning In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Switching on Blind Spot Assist Rnot give a warning
X Make sure that the radar sensor system There is a risk of an accident.
(Y page 199) and Blind Spot Assist Always pay particular attention to the traffic
(Y page 195) are activated in the on-board situation and stay in lane, in particular if
computer. warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
ignition lock. G WARNING
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
light up red for approximately return the vehicle to the original lane. There
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
Lane Keeping Assist yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
front of your vehicle by means of a camera at Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist an accident nor override the laws of physics.
detects lane markings on the road and warns Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Z
184 Driving systems
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in the on-board computer; to do so, select
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good Standard or Adaptive (Y page 195).
time and for staying in your lane. Symbol : appears in the multifunction
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the display.
Driving and parking
vehicle in the lane. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

The system may be impaired or may not (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
function if: symbol : is highlighted. Lane Keeping
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to Assist is ready for use.
insufficient illumination of the road, or due When Standard is selected, no warning
to snow, rain, fog or spray vibration occurs if:
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road the warnings are suppressed for a certain
surface is wet) period of time.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the ABS, BAS or ESP®.
vicinity of the camera
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
vibration occurs if:
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. Ryou brake hard.
lanes branch off, cross one another or Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
merge obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Rthe road is narrow and winding Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane In order that you are warned only when
A warning may be given if a front wheel necessary and in good time if you cross the
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you lane marking, the system recognizes certain
by means of intermittent vibration in the conditions and warns you accordingly.
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
freeway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rtheroad has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

185
On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 186
Displays and operation .................... 186
Menus and submenus ...................... 189
Display messages ............................. 200
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 224

186 Displays and operation
Useful information multifunction display. You should therefore

make sure your vehicle is operating safely at
i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident.
equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel
time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 29).
Manual. Country-specific differences are
not be equipped with all features Displays and operation
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions. Instrument cluster lighting
i Read the information on qualified The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the brightness
control knob.
Important safety notes The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 29).
G WARNING
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the or counter-clockwise.
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
from traffic conditions. You could also lose L, the brightness is dependent upon
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an the brightness of the ambient light.
accident. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
Only operate the equipment when the traffic automatically controls the brightness of
situation permits. If you are not sure that this the multifunction display.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
to traffic conditions and operate the
cluster are not illuminated.
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING Coolant temperature display

If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize G WARNING
function restrictions in systems relevant to Driving when your engine is overheated can
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle cause some fluids which may have leaked into
may be impaired. There is a risk of an the engine compartment to catch fire. You
accident. could be seriously burned.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Steam from an overheated engine can cause
at a qualified specialist workshop serious burns which can occur just by opening
immediately. the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
You must observe the legal requirements for Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
the country in which you are currently driving other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
when operating the on-board computer. vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
The on-board computer only shows messages the engine has cooled down.
or warnings from certain systems in the

Displays and operation 187
! A display message is shown if the coolant The segments between the speed of the

temperature is too high. vehicle in front and the stored speed light
If the coolant temperature is over up.
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operating the on-board computer
The coolant temperature gage is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side. Overview
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road : Multifunction display
conditions when temperatures are around ; Switches on the Voice Control System;
freezing point. see the separate operating instructions
The outside temperature display is in the = Right control panel
multifunction display. ? Left control panel
Changes in the outside temperature are A Back button
displayed after a short delay.
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
Speedometer with segments lock.
The segments in the speedometer indicate You can control the multifunction display and
which speed range is available. the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
RCruise control activated (Y page 157): wheel.
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 159):
One or two segments in the set speed

range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
Z
188 Displays and operation
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate
RIn the Tel(telephone) menu: operating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial
: memory
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu,
starts rapid scrolling through the
phone book Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits phone book/redial
memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call : Time
RSwitches to the redial memory ; Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 197)
= Text field
? Menu bar

Menus and submenus 189
A Drive program (Y page 141) The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly

B Transmission position (Y page 141) in vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles with
COMAND. The examples given in this
X To show menu bar ?: press the = Operator's Manual apply to vehicles
or ; button on the steering wheel. equipped with COMAND.
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or Trip menu
submenu as well as display messages.
Standard display
i You can set the time using the audio
system or COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 172)
CRUISE Cruise Control (Y page 157)
è Rear window wiper (Y page 112) X Press and hold the % button on the
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist steering wheel until the Trip menu with
(Y page 102) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180) shown.
Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 183)
ë HOLD function (Y page 167) Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Ä Distance warning function
(Y page 233)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Operating the on-board computer
Example: trip computer "From Start"
(Y page 187).
: Distance
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: ; Time
= Average speed
RTrip menu (Y page 189)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
? Average fuel consumption
(Y page 191) X Press the = or ; button on the
RAudio menu (Y page 192) steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
RTel (telephone) menu (Y page 193) X Press the 9 or : button to select
RDriveAssist (Assistance) menu From Start or From Reset.

(Y page 194) The values in the From Start submenu are
RServ menu (Y page 196) calculated from the start of a journey, while
RSett menu (Y page 196) the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 190).
Z
190 Menus and submenus
The From Start trip computer is Approximate range : is calculated

automatically reset when: according to the current driving style and the
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a
than four hours. small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the
R999 hours have been exceeded. display shows a vehicle being refueled C
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. instead of range :.
If the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles, the From Reset trip computer
Digital speedometer
is automatically reset.
ECO display
X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Example: ECO display digital speedometer :.
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. Resetting values
X Press 9 or : to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 153).
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
Displaying the range and current fuel You can reset the values of the following
consumption functions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
current fuel consumption ; and
approximate range :. press a to confirm.

i When you reset the values in the "ECO = Current road

display", the values in the trip computer ? "Follow the road's course" symbol
"From start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From Change of direction announced without a
start", the values in the "ECO display" are lane recommendation
likewise reset.
Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
X Switch on Audio 20 with Becker® MAP
PILOT or COMAND (see the separate : Road into which the change of direction
operating instructions). leads
X Press the = or ; button on the ; Distance to change of direction and visual
steering wheel to select the Navi menu. distance display
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display = Symbol for change of direction
shows navigation instructions. For more When a change of direction is announced, you
information, see the separate operating will see symbol = for the change of direction
instructions. and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
Route guidance not active display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Direction of travel
; Current road
Route guidance active : Road into which the change of direction

leads
No change of direction announced
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Lane recommendation
? New lane during a change of direction
A Uninterrupted lane
B Symbol for change of direction
: Distance to the destination On multilane roads, the system can display

lane recommendation = for the next change
; Distance to the next change of direction
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Z
Lane recommendations are only displayed if X To select a station from the station
the relevant data is available on the digital list: press and briefly hold the 9
map. or : button.
If no station list is received:
Other status indicators of the X To select a station using the station
navigation system search: press and briefly hold the 9
RO: you have reached the destination or an or : button.
intermediate destination.
i For information on changing waveband
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:
and storing stations, see the separate
calculating a new route
operating instructions.
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle
position is outside the area of the digital i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
map (off-map position). normal radio.
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to For more information on satellite radio
the selected destination. operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Audio menu Operating an audio player or audio

media
Selecting a radio station
CD changer display (example)

: Waveband : Current CD in the CD changer
; Station frequency with memory position ; Current title
i The memory position is only displayed Audio data from various audio devices or
along with station ; if this has been media can be played, depending on the
stored. equipment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
and select Radio; see the separate and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3
operating instructions. mode; see the separate operating
X Press the = or ; button on the instructions.
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X Press the = or ; button on the
X To select a stored station: briefly press steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
the 9 or : button. X To select the next/previous track:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
track ; has been reached.

If you press and hold 9 or :, the Only operate the equipment when the traffic

rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all situation permits. If you are not sure that this
audio drives or data carriers support this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
function. to traffic conditions and operate the
If track information is stored on the audio equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
device or medium, the multifunction display
When telephoning, you must observe the
will show the number and title of the track.
legal requirements for the country in which
The current track does not appear in audio
you are currently driving.
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected). X Switch on your mobile phone and audio
system or COMAND, see the separate
Video DVD operation operating instructions.
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the
audio system or COMAND; see the
separate operating instructions.
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
DVD changer display (example)
RPhone READY or the name of the network
: Current DVD in the DVD changer
provider: the mobile phone has found a
; Current scene network and is ready to receive.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; RPhone No Service: there is no network
see the separate operating instructions. available or the mobile phone is searching
X Press the = or ; button on the for a network.
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene: Accepting a call
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
scene ; has been reached.
Example: incoming call

Telephone menu
X Press the 6 button on the steering
Introduction wheel to accept an incoming call.
G WARNING If someone calls you when you are in the
If you operate information systems and Tel menu, a display message appears in the
communication equipment integrated in the multifunction display.
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
from traffic conditions. You could also lose accept a call.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Z
Rejecting or ending a call X Press the 6 or a button to start

X
dialing.
Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel. or
X If you do not want to make a call: press
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
the ~ or % button.
reject or end a call.
Dialing a number from the phone book

Assistance menu
steering wheel to select the Tel menu. Introduction
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one
second.
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
following options:
button or reach the end of the list.
Rshowing the distance display
X If only one telephone number is stored
Ractivating/deactivating ESP®
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing. Ractivating/deactivating the distance
or warning function
Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a ASSIST
button to display the numbers. Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
number you want to dial. Assist

X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing. Showing the distance display
or X Press the = or ; button on the
X If you do not want to make a call: press steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
the ~ or % button. menu.
Redialing Distance Display.

The on-board computer saves the last names
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
appears in the multifunction display
X Press the = or ; button on the (Y page 163).
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the Deactivating/activating ESP®
redial memory.
Further information about ESP®(Y page 62).
desired name or number.

X Start the engine. Activating/deactivating ATTENTION

X Press the = or ; button on the ASSIST
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist X Press the = or ; button on the
menu. steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
X Press the 9 or : button to select menu.
ESP. X Press 9 or : to select Attention
X Press the a button. Asst.
X To deactivate: press a again. X Press the a button.
The å warning lamp in the instrument The current selection is displayed.
cluster lights up. X To activate/deactivate: press the a
X To activate: press a again. button again.
The å warning lamp in the instrument When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180) is
cluster goes out. activated, the À symbol appears in the
multifunction display when the ignition is on.
Switching the distance warning
function on and off Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
X Press the = or ; button on the Assist
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist X Press the = or ; button on the
menu. steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
X Press 9 or : to select Distance menu.
Warning. X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot
X Press the a button. Assist.
The current selection is displayed. X Press the a button.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a The current selection is displayed.
button again. X To activate/deactivate: press the a
When the distance warning function is button again.
activated, the multifunction display shows For further information about Blind Spot
the Ä symbol if the HOLD function is not Assist, see (Y page 181).
activated (Y page 167). When the Blind Spot Assist: Sensors
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if Deactivated message is shown, the radar
PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving sensors are deactivated.
at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j X Switch on the radar sensor system
Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead (Y page 199).
of the Ä symbol (Y page 172).
Further information on the distance warning
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
function (Y page 60).
Assist
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel
to select Lane Keep. Asst.
Z
X Press the a button. Rchanging the convenience settings

The current selection is displayed. Rrestoring the factory settings
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Instrument cluster
Standard or Adaptive.
Selecting the unit of measurement for
X Press the a button to save the setting.
distance
If Lane Keeping Assist is activated You can determine whether the multifunction
(Y page 183) and the ignition is switched on, display shows some messages in miles or
the Ã symbol appears in the multifunction kilometers.
display. X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Maintenance menu
Inst. Cluster submenu.
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting km or
miles.
In the Serv menu, you have the following X Press the a button to save the setting.
options: The selected unit of measurement for
RCalling up display messages in message distance applies to:
memory (Y page 200) Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
system (Y page 305)
Rthe trip computer
RCalling up the service due date
Rthe current consumption and the range
(Y page 270)
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menu
Settings menu Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
Introduction
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometer

on/off
Only vehicles with manual transmission have
this function.
In the Sett menu, you have the following
options:
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings
Rchanging the light settings
Rchanging the vehicle settings

X Press : or 9 to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Speedometer [mph]: function. Daytime Running Lights function.
You will see the selected setting: On or You will see the selected setting: Enabled
Off. or Disabled.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the a button to save the setting.
i Speed is displayed in mph. Further information on daytime running

lamps (Y page 99).
The Speedometer [mph] function allows you
to choose whether the status area in the Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
multifunction display always shows the speed off
in mph instead of the outside temperature. X Press the = or ; button on the
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the Lights submenu.
outside temperature. X Press a to confirm.
X X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu. Adaptive Highbeam Assist function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the For further information about Adaptive
Permanent Display: function. Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 102).
You will see the selected setting Outside Setting the brightness of the ambient
Temperature or Speedometer [km/h] lighting
(USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada). X Press the = or ; button on the
X Press the a button to save the setting. steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
(Canada). Lights submenu.
Lights X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-function.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/ You will see the selected setting.
off
Daytime running lamps are required by law
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytime
running lamps" function via the on-board brightness to any level from Off to Level
computer. 5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu. setting.
Lights submenu.
Z
Activating/deactivating surround RParkinglamps

lighting and exterior lighting delayed RFrontfog lamps
switch-off RLow-beam headlamps
If you have activated the Locator RDaytime running lamps
Lighting: function and the light switch is set RSide marker lamps
to Ã, the following functions are activated
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting Activating/deactivating the interior
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking lighting delayed switch-off
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, If you activate the Interior Lighting
the surround lighting is switched off and Delay function, the interior lighting remains
automatic headlamp mode is activated on for 20seconds after you remove the
(Y page 99). SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
60 seconds after the engine is switched off.
If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,
the exterior lighting goes off after Lights submenu.
15 seconds. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the : or 9 button to select the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. Interior Lighting Delay function.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the You will see the selected setting: Enabled
Lights submenu. or Disabled.
Locator Lighting function. Vehicle
You will see the selected setting: Enabled Activating/deactivating the automatic
or Disabled. door locking mechanism
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
exterior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Vehicle submenu.
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press a to confirm.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
ignition lock. Automatic Door Lock function.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is You will see the selected setting: Enabled
deactivated. or Disabled.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is X Press the a button to save the setting.
reactivated the next time you start the
If you select the Automatic Door Lock
engine.
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
when the surround lighting and delayed
i For further information on the automatic
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
locking feature, see (Y page 74).
following light up:

Activating/deactivating the acoustic X Press the : or 9 button to select the

locking verification signal Fold Mirrors in when Locking:
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock You will see the selected setting: Enabled
Feedback: function, an acoustic signal or Disabled.
sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the If you switch on the Fold Mirrors in when
steering wheel to select the Sett menu. Locking: function, the exterior mirrors fold
X Press the : or 9 button to select the in when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock the
Vehicle submenu. vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
X Press a to confirm. passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
again.
Acoustic Lock Feedback: function. If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
on the door (Y page 93), they will not fold out
or Disabled.
automatically. The exterior mirrors can then
only be folded out using the button on the
door.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
Restoring the factory settings
steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the = or ; button on the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
Vehicle submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press a to confirm. Factory Setting submenu.

Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual). The Reset All Settings? message
You will see the selected setting: Enabled appears.
or Disabled. X Press the : or 9 button to select
X Press the a button to save the setting. No or Yes.

X Press a to confirm the selection.
Convenience If you have selected Yes , the multifunction

display shows a confirmation message.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
locking feature on/off Lights: function in the Lights submenu is
This function is only available on vehicles with only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
the memory function (Y page 95).
Convenience submenu.
Z
200 Display messages
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 167) and parking (Y page 149).
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 201
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start
Currently assist are temporarily unavailable.
Unavailable See
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
Z


can increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.


÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable
due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the

HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a
÷ malfunction.
Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
can increase.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 150).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Z

Please Release The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
Parking Brake flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 150).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada
To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to P.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

X Do not drive on.


The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 320).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of
Inoperative overvoltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the
only) ignition was switched off.
Turn On the X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
Ignition to
Release the
Parking Brake


$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are

malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
SRS Malfunction cluster.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 38).
Z

6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left
Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
or Front Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Malfunction be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Left
or Rear Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Malfunction be triggered.
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp

also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center
be triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the
Left Side Curtain instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
Curtain Airbag unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
Malfunction triggered.
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left
(Y page 104).
Cornering Light or
Check Right or
Cornering Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
(Y page 104).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 104).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 104).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Turn Signal or
(Y page 104).
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal or
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
(Y page 104).
Lamp
or
Z

b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
(Y page 104).
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 104).
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail or
and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 104).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

License Plate Lamp
(Y page 104).
or
b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.

Check Left Fog
(Y page 104).
Lamp or Check
Right Fog Lamp or
b The rear fog lamp is defective.

Rear Fog Lamp
(Y page 104).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 104).
Parking Lamp or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


b The backup lamp is defective.
Backup Light
(Y page 104).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 104).
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 104).
Sidemarker Lamp or
Sidemarker Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 104).
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right or
Sidemarker Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
(Y page 104).
Running Light or
Check Right or
Daytime Running X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Light
System Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
Z

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 269).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.


? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.

Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
Z

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 267).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 268).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USA only).
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:

Driving systems

À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 167).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 167).
Radar Sensor The radar sensor system is deactivated.

Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 199).
Operator's Manual
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the windshield.
Z

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Rthe sensors are dirty.
Unavailable See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
ManualBlind Spot
range.
Assist Currently
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 275).
X Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
Canceled fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 172).


Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
Inoperative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 172).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 159). If it was
deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 159).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Unavailable See Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirty
Operator's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 275).
X Restart the engine.
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may also
Inoperative have failed.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Passive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

--- mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 161).
Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
--- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 158).

Tires

Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Tire Pressure Soon loss in pressure.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 281).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 305).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 305).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
Malfunction being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
Start Engine position N without depressing the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D

Depress Brake and without starting the engine.
Start Engine X Start the engine.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to

the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then
can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the
parking lock remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you
can only shift out of position P into another transmission
position when the engine is running.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.
Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
in P or D.
Risk of Vehicle A warning tone also sounds.
Rolling Away X Shift the transmission to position P.


Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift The vehicle is moving.

to 'P' when X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Vehicle is attention to road and traffic conditions.
Stationary X Shift the transmission to position P.
Reversing Not The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back

Possible Service up.
Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

Malfunction X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

Malfunction Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stop Vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated.

to P Leave Engine X Drive on carefully.
Running The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the
display message has disappeared.
Z

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.
? The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering
Malfunction See G WARNING
Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol


¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
i If you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the winter
months, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. In this case the Check Washer Fluid display
message could also be shown in the multifunction display.
X Add washer fluid (Y page 269).
Wiper The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

Malfunctioning X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunctioning
SmartKey
+ You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
+ The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
+ The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Z
224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
belt warning lamp lights
up for six seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In
The red seat belt addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have
warning lamp flashes briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
sounds. ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are

driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 225
Safety systems

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a
The yellow ABS warning malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION
lamp is lit while the ASSIST, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function
engine is running. and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.
G WARNING
can increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Z

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION

The yellow ABS warning ASSIST, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD
lamp is lit while the function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
engine is running. example.
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
can increase.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.


! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION
The yellow ABS warning PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist
lamp is lit while the are unavailable, for example.
engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
warning tone also
sounds. G WARNING
can increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION
J (Canada only) PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist
÷å! are also unavailable, for example.
The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamp, the yellow ESP® G WARNING
and ESP® OFF warning The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
lamps and the yellow functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
ABS warning lamp are lock if you brake hard, for example.
lit while the engine is
running.
can increase.
display.
Z

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
motion. necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).

å ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will not
The yellow ESP® OFF stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
warning lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is running.
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷å ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function

The yellow ESP® and and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps are lit while the
G WARNING
engine is running.
increase.
display.


÷å ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
The yellow ESP® and unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
Z

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red indicator lamp
for the electric parking
brake flashes or lights
up and/or the yellow
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
The red SRS warning System).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
be triggered.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 38).

Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal
requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
æ The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the engine is X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
running. cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is
The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gage is at paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
Z

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
warning lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
while the engine is malfunctioning.
running. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is G WARNING
running. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
display.


X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
Driving systems

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance of travel at too high a speed.
warning lamp lights up X Be prepared to brake immediately.
while the vehicle is in X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
motion. A warning tone brake or take evasive action.
also sounds.
Z
234

235

Loading guidelines ............................ 236
Stowage areas .................................. 237
Features ............................................. 247
Stowage and features

236 Loading guidelines
Useful information weight rating of the vehicle (including

occupants). The values are specified on the
i This Operator's Manual describes all vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of
models and all standard and optional the driver's door.
equipment of your vehicle available at the RThe cargo compartment is the preferred
time of publication of the Operator's place to carry objects.
Manual. Country-specific differences are RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible. Please note that your vehicle may possible and as low down in the cargo
not be equipped with all features compartment as possible.
described. This also applies to safety- RThe load must not protrude above the
related systems and functions. upper edge of the seat backrests.
i Read the information on qualified RAlways place the load against the rear or
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
Loading guidelines RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
G WARNING RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or nets to transport loads and luggage.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle materials appropriate for the weight and
occupants. There is a risk of injury, size of the load.
particularly in the event of sudden braking or RHook in the cargo net when loading.
a sudden change in direction.
RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage
Always store objects so that they cannot be well under the cargo compartment floor is
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or 55 lbs (25 kg).
loads against slipping or tipping before the
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
journey.
wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
for protection.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust ! Do not position the load on one part of the
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate folding cargo compartment floor only. The
is open when the engine is running, maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg).
fumes could enter the passenger Distribute the weight evenly to avoid
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. damaging the cargo compartment floor.
Turn off the engine before opening the Place a solid board under the load if
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. necessary. Please note that the load on the
cargo compartment floor will be increased
The handling characteristics of a laden when the load is lashed down.
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the gross axle

Stowage areas 237
Stowage areas Eyeglasses compartment
Stowage space
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be X To open: press marking :.
thrown around in such situations. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
RAlways make sure that objects do not is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets. Stowage compartment in the center
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
console
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box
X To open: press the marking on cover :.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there is an open instead of a closed
stowage compartment or an ashtray in the
center console.
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i There is a pen holder at the top of the
glove box flap.
Z
238 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment in front of the Stowage compartment under the driver's

armrest (vehicles with automatic seat and front-passenger seat
transmission) G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the
stowage compartment, the cover may not be
able to restrain the items. Items may be
thrown out of the stowage compartment and
hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.

Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the cargo
compartment.
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
The maximum permissible load of the
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the
stowage compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).
insert for cleaning. When removing the
insert you will have to overcome some
slight resistance.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To open: pull handle : up and fold

cover ; forwards.
Stowage space in the rear

X To open: on vehicles with moveable
armrests, make sure that the armrest is in Stowage compartment in the rear center
the rearmost position. console
X Press button : and fold the armrest up.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a

USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
(see the separate COMAND Operating
Instructions).

Stowage areas 239
X To open: pull down the top of stowage Folding backrest on the front-
compartment : by the edge of the handle. passenger seat
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, G WARNING
there may be an open stowage space above If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is
the stowage compartment. folded forward, rear seat passengers can
come in contact with parts of the seat
Folding table
mechanism. particularly in the event of an
G WARNING accident, heavy braking or a sudden change

If the folding table is folded out while the of direction. There is a risk of injury.
vehicle is in motion, passengers can be If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the
thrown against it, particularly in the event of front-passenger seat is folded forward, they
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden must sit in the rear seat behind the driver.
change of direction. There is a risk of injury.
Fold the folding table away before each The backrest of the front-passenger seat can
journey. be folded forwards to increase the cargo
compartment capacity.
! Do not load the folding table with more
than the maximum permissible load of
4.4 lbs (2 kg).
X To fold forward: gently push the backrest

back.
X Pull release handle : and fold the
X To fold out: pull folding table : up in the backrest fully onto the seat cushion until it
direction of the arrow to the desired engages.
position.
X To fold back: gently push the backrest
X To fold away: push folding table : down
down and pull release handle :.
onto the backrest.
X Fold the seat backrest back until it
engages.
Parcel nets
Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger Through-loading facility in the rear
footwell and on the back of the driver's and
the front-passenger seat. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 237).
Z
240 Stowage areas
Cargo compartment enlargement

G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be

pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
X To open: fold down seat armrest :. seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
X Pull the cover, which can now be seen, seat belt can no longer offer the intended
forwards by the grip until it lies on level of protection and could even cause
armrest :. injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear
compartment cannot be restrained by the
bench seat into the uppermost position
seat backrest.
(Y page 89).
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear

compartment forwards, make sure that the
rear compartment armrest and the
cupholder are folded in. They may
otherwise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
X Slide locking mechanism = in the
direction of the arrow. Vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS
X Swing flap ; fully to the side.
system
Flap ; is held open by a magnet. Folding the rear seat backrest forward
X To close: swing flap ; in the cargo The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
compartment back until it engages.
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
X Fold the cover forwards until it engages into
armrest :.
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.

Stowage areas 241
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 90).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS

system
Folding the rear seat backrest forward

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
(Y page 90).
forward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release
handle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
X Fold backrest : forwards.
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back X Fully insert the backrest head restraints
(Y page 90).
X Move the rear seat as far back as possible
(Y page 243).
X Pull right or left loop ; on the backrest in
the direction of the arrow.
released.
X Fold down backrest : fully.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary. back if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
Z
242 Stowage areas
Folding the rear seat backrest back Making the best use of your cargo
compartment:
RLoad capacity is increased when
backrest : is set to the load position (90°)
(Y page 242).
RVehicles with a height-adjustable trunk
floor: a level load surface can be obtained
by moving the trunk floor to the upper
position (Y page 246).
RA larger load area can be obtained by

moving the rear bench seat as far forward
X
as possible (Y page 243).
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
RThe load area can be lengthened by folding
forward the folding backrest of the front-
! Make sure that the seat belt does not passenger seat (Y page 239) and the
become trapped when folding the rear seat corresponding backrest in the rear.
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged. Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
backrests
X Swing backrest : back.
You can set the angle of the seat backrests
X Adjust the backrest to the desired angle by to one of 13 detent positions.
pulling the loop (Y page 242).
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 90).
back if necessary.
Notes on using the cargo compartment
X Pull right or left release loop ; forwards in

the direction of the arrow.
released.
X Pull backrest : forward in the direction of
the arrow, or push it back and let it engage.
Load position X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,
lean firmly against backrest :.
i The angle and fore/aft position of the left
and right rear seats can be separately
adjusted for each seat in order to make
better use of the cargo compartment.

Stowage areas 243
Depending on the angle of the backrest, RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
therefore, the right and left rear seats can a load, as these are only intended as an
be pushed back varying distances until the anti-slip protection for light loads.
backrest is resting against the cargo RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
compartment cover. or corners.
If the backrest comes into contact with RPad sharp edges for protection.
surrounding parts of the cargo There are four cargo tie-down rings in the
compartment paneling, reduce the angle of cargo compartment.
the backrest.

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
! When moving the rear seats back, make
sure there are no objects in the footwell or
behind the seats. The rear seats and/or the
objects could otherwise be damaged.
: Cargo tie-down rings
Bag hook
G WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of
X Lift the left or right release handle and slide luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
the corresponding seat forwards or vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
backwards. changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
X Let go of the release handle again.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
position. objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load

Securing cargo of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
Cargo tie-down rings
There is one bag hook on either side of the
Observe the following notes on securing cargo compartment.
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 236).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
Z
244 Stowage areas
Extending/retracting the cargo

compartment cover
: Bag hook
X To extend: pull the cargo compartment

Cargo compartment cover
cover back by grab handle : and clip it
Important safety notes into retainers ; on the left and right.
X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
G WARNING
cover from retainers ; on the left and right
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, and guide it forwards by grab handle :
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could until it is fully retracted.
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event Installing/removing the cargo
of an accident. There is an increased risk of compartment cover
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargo
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the cargo compartment
X To remove: make sure that the cargo
cover.
compartment cover is rolled up.
! When removing and installing the cargo X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment
compartment cover, ensure that its end cover : in the direction of the arrow on
caps do not scrape the light-colored parts
the right or left side using grip =.
of the vehicle.
X Push cargo compartment cover : into
The cargo compartment cover is located
opposite anchorage ;.
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
X Remove cargo compartment cover :
upwards.

Stowage areas 245
X To install: set cargo compartment Attaching and tightening the cargo net
cover : on the right or left-hand side in
anchorage ;.
X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo
compartment cover : in the direction of
the arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.

Cargo net
X To attach and tighten: insert guide
G WARNING rod : into bracket ;.
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
X Attach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-down
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured ring and pull down on the loose end of the
load during sudden changes in direction, lashing strap until the cargo net is taut.
braking or in the event of an accident. There X After driving a short distance, check the
is an increased risk of injury or even fatal tension of the cargo net and retighten it if
injury. necessary.
Always store objects so that they cannot be X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or = up to reduce the tension in the lashing
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by strap.
using tie downs, even if you are using the X Unhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-
cargo net. down ring.
X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;.
It is important to use a cargo net if you load
the vehicle with small objects above the seat X To stow: press the red button on the upper
backrests. For safety reasons, always use a and lower guide rod.
cargo net when transporting loads. X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.
The cargo net is located in the stowage space X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo
under the cargo compartment floor net holder.
(Y page 245).
X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the
cargo net. Stowage well under the cargo
X Unroll and unfold the cargo net. compartment floor
The joints on the upper and lower guide rod Important safety notes
should engage audibly.
The corresponding cargo tie down rings for G WARNING
tightening the cargo net are in the cargo If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
compartment (Y page 243). is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Z
246 Stowage areas
Always close the cargo compartment floor

before a journey.
! The maximum load capacity of the

stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor is 55 lbs (25 kg).
Opening/closing the cargo

compartment floor
A bracket for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc.

is located underneath the cargo X Attach hook = to the cargo
compartment floor. compartment's upper seal ?.
X To close: detach hook = from seal ?.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the cargo compartment floor.
X Fold the trunk floor down.
X Press the trunk floor down until it engages.
Setting the height of the trunk floor

The stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor can be increased or
X To open: open the tailgate. decreased in size as necessary. To do this,
X Press down handle : on ribbing ;. you can lock the floor at two different heights.
Handle : folds up. The upper catch gives a flat load surface when
X Swing the cargo compartment floor
the rear bench seat is folded forward.
upwards using handle : until it rests
against the cargo compartment cover.
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the

cargo compartment floor.

Features 247
X To raise: using handle :, lift up cargo open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier
compartment floor ; in the direction of is installed.
arrow = and pull it upwards. The maximum roof load is 165 lbs((75 kg).
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
To do this, push the trunk floor away so that load may become detached from the vehicle.
it engages in the guide on the upper level. You must therefore ensure that you observe
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
the upper position. instructions.

i Carry out this step using both hands.
X To lower: raise cargo compartment
Attaching the roof carrier
floor ; slightly using handle : and pull it
towards you.
X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again
slowly. Whilst doing so, press the trunk
floor into the lower level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in
the lower position.
Roof carrier
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
G WARNING X Fold covers : upwards.
When you load the roof, the center of gravity X Only secure the roof carrier to the
of the vehicle rises and the driving anchorage points under covers :.
characteristics change. If you exceed the
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and instructions.
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
Never exceed the maximum roof load and Features
adjust your driving style. Cup holder
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you Important safety notes
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. G WARNING
This helps to prevent damage to the The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
vehicle. whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
Position the load on the roof rack in such a traveling, the container may be flung around
way that the vehicle will not sustain and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle
damage even when it is in motion. occupants may come into contact with the
liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
may be distracted from the traffic conditions
equipment, you can raise the panorama
and you could lose control of the vehicle.
roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and
Z
248 Features
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is

stationary. Only use the cup holder for
containers of the right size. Always close the
container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the

event of sudden braking or a sudden change
X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections
in direction.
of cup holder : on the driver's and front-
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
passenger sides until they release.
thrown around in such situations.
X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets be removed.
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors X To install: insert the cup holder into lateral
provide space for bottles:
curved sections ; in the stowage
Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l) compartment. Insert the cup holder so that
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) the wedge of the upper section of cup
holder : faces forwards.
Cup holder in the front-compartment X Press the cup holder downwards until it
center console engages on the right and left-hand sides.
The cup holder and the rubber mat
underneath can be removed for cleaning. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.

Features 249
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side
X Fold down the sun visor.

X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun
X To open: press the front of cup holder :
visor horizontally as desired.
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back Ashtray
until it engages.
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
Sun visors not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
Overview the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
G WARNING the stowage space could be damaged.
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage

compartment
X To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert =
up ; and out.
: Mirror light
X To re-install the insert: press insert =
; Bracket
into the holder until it engages.
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Z
250 Features
i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can lighter when road and traffic conditions
use the resulting compartment for permit.
stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage

compartment
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
cover :.
the direction of arrow ? until it audibly
The stowage compartment opens.
releases.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
X Lift insert ; up and out.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
X To install the insert: place insert ; from
automatically when the heating element is
above into the holder and press down until red-hot.
it engages.
12 V sockets
Cigarette lighter
Points to observe before use
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette ignition lock (Y page 135).
lighter. The sockets can be used for accessories with
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Rthe
Accessories include such items as lamps or
hot cigarette lighter falls
chargers for mobile phones.
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
If you use the sockets for long periods when
objects, for example
the engine is switched off, the battery may
There is a risk of fire and injury. discharge.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
out of reach of children. Never leave children on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
unsupervised in the vehicle. the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
Your attention must always be focused on the ensures that there is sufficient power to
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette start the engine.

Features 251
Socket in the front-compartment center Socket in the rear-compartment center

console console

Vehicles with a cover over the stowage X Pull cover : out by its top edge.
compartment
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens. Socket in the cargo compartment
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.

Vehicles without a cover over the stowage
compartment
X Lift up the cover of socket :. mbrace
! You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
Z
252 Features
If you have questions about the activation, USA only: you can find information and a
contact one of the following telephone description of all available features under
hotlines: "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at System self-test
1-800-FOR-MERCedes After you have switched on the ignition, the
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 system carries out a self-diagnosis.
RCanada: Customer Service at
A malfunction in the system has been
1-888-923-8367 detected if one of the following occurs:
Shortly after successfully registering with the RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID not come on during the system self-test.
and password will be sent to you by post. USA RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
only: you can use this password to log onto
Assistance button does not light up during
the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at
self-diagnosis of the system.
http://www.mbusa.com.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
The mbrace system is available if:
button does not light up during self-
Rit has been activated and is operational diagnosis of the system.
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
is available for transmitting data to the following buttons continues to light up red
Customer Center after the system self-diagnosis:
Ra service subscription is available - SOS button
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged - the F Roadside Assistance call
i Determining the location of the vehicle on button

a map is only possible if: - the ï MB Info call button
RGPS RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace

reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
Service Not Activated message
appears in the multifunction display after
the Customer Assistance Center.
the system self-diagnosis.
The mbrace system If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, expected. In the event of an emergency, help
proceed as follows: will have to be summoned by other means.
X Press the W or X button on the Have the system checked at the nearest
multifunction steering wheel. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
or the following service hotlines:
X Use the volume controller of the audio RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
system/COMAND. Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
The mbrace system provides various
or 1-866-990-9007
services, e.g.:
Rautomatic and manual emergency call 1-888-923-8367
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call

Features 253
Emergency call Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle

occupants.
Important safety notes RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
! You must have a license agreement to Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
activate the mbrace service. Make sure Center attempts to get more information
that your system is activated and ready for on the emergency.
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call RIf there is no response from the vehicle
button. If any of the steps mentioned are occupants, an ambulance is immediately
not carried out, the system may not be sent to the vehicle.

activated.
The mbrace system has not been able to
If you have questions about the activation, initiate an emergency call if no voice
contact one of the following telephone connection to the Response Center has been
hotlines: established. This can occur, for example, if
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer the relevant mobile phone network is not
Assistance Center at available. The indicator lamp in the SOS
1-800-FOR-MERCedes button flashes continuously.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 The Call Failed message appears in the
RCanada: Customer Service at multifunction display and must be confirmed.
1-888-923-8367 In this case, seek assistance by other means.
General notes Making an emergency call
An emergency call is dialed automatically if G WARNING
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
triggered.
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
i You cannot end an automatically emergency if:
triggered emergency call yourself. Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the
An emergency call can also be initiated vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
manually. accident
As soon as the emergency call has been Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button road
flashes. The Connecting Call message Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
appears in the multifunction display. seen by other road users, particularly when
The audio output is muted. dark or in poor visibility conditions
Once the connection has been made, the There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Call Connected message appears in the Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
multifunction display. similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
All important information on the emergency so. Move to a safe location along with other
is transmitted, for example: vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
RCurrent the vehicle in accordance with national
location of the vehicle (as
regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
determined by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been

initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Mercedes-Benz
Z
254 Features
flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
If a cellular phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz

X To initiate an emergency call Customer Assistance Center, for example:
manually: press cover : briefly to open. RCurrent location of the vehicle
X Press SOS button ; briefly. RVehicle identification number
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; i The display of the audio system or
flashes until the emergency call is COMAND shows that an mbrace call is
concluded. active. During the call, you can change to
X Wait for a voice connection to the the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance button on COMAND, for example.
Center. Voice output is not available.
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
A voice connection is established between
i If the mobile phone network is not the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
available, mbrace is not able to make an Center and the vehicle occupants.
emergency call. If you leave the vehicle From the vehicle remote malfunction
immediately after pressing the SOS button, diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
you do not know if mbrace has successfully Assistance center can ascertain the nature of
made the emergency call. In this situation, the problem (Y page 258).
seek additional assistance by other means. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing. Further details are available in your
mbrace manual.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
X Press Roadside Assistance button :.
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
established.
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in Roadside Assistance button : This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.

Features 255
The Call Failed message appears in the A voice connection is established between
multifunction display. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the Center and the vehicle occupants. You can
obtain information on how to operate your
multifunction steering wheel.
vehicle's systems, on the location of the
or nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
X Press the corresponding button for ending and on further products and services offered
a phone call on the audio system or on by Mercedes-Benz USA.
COMAND. USA only: you can find further information on

the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
MB Info call button http://www.mbusa.com.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate an
MB Info call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
The Call Failed message appears in the
X Press MB Info call button :. multifunction display.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
multifunction steering wheel.
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while
the connection is being made. The or
Connecting Call message appears on X Press the corresponding button for ending
the multifunction display. The audio system a phone call on the audio system or on
is muted. COMAND.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the Call priority
multifunction display. When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
If a cellular phone network is available and Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace call can still be initiated. In this case, an
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call will take priority and override
Customer Assistance Center, for example: all other active calls.
RCurrent location of the vehicle The indicator lamp of the respective button
RVehicle identification number flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
i The display of the audio system or Benz Customer Assistance Center.
COMAND shows that an mbrace call is
active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
Z
256 Features
All other calls can be ended by pressing: i You can also use the Route Assistance
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction function if your vehicle is not equipped with
steering wheel a navigation system.
Rthe corresponding button on the audio Within the framework of this service, you
system or on COMAND for ending a receive a professional and reliable form of
telephone call navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output
The customer service representative finds a
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
connected to COMAND. However, if you

current position and the desired destination.
would like to use your mobile phone, do so
You will then be guided live through the
only when the vehicle is stationary and in a
current route section.
safe location.
Search & Send
Downloading destinations in COMAND
General notes
Downloading destinations
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle
Destination Download gives you access to a
must be equipped with mbrace and a
data bank with over 15 million Points of
navigation system. You must also have an
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
mbrace service subscription.
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be "Search & Send" is a destination entry
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the service. A destination address which is found
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ on Google Maps® can be transferred via
important destinations in the vicinity. mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation
Furthermore, you can download routes with system.
up to 20 way points. Specifying and sending the destination
You are prompted to confirm route guidance address
to the address entered. X Go to the website http://
The system calculates the route and www.maps.google.com and enter a
subsequently starts the route guidance with destination address into the entry field.
the address entered. X To send the destination address to the
i If you select No, the address can be stored e-mail address of your mbrace
in the address book. account: click on the corresponding
button.
i The Destination Download function is
available if the corresponding mobile i Example:
phone network is available and data If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
transfer is possible. 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
i You can only use the Destination
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Download function if the vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system. In the relevant field, enter the e-mail
address which you specified when
Route Assistance activating your mbrace account.
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS X Click "Send".
Package and cannot be purchased
separately.

Features 257
i Information on specific commands such RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be Assistance Center at
found on the website. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
Calling up destination addresses RCanada: Customer Service at
X Switch on the ignition.
1-888-923-8367
The destination address is loaded into the You will be asked for your password.
vehicle's navigation system.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
A display message appears, asking upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer

whether navigation should be started. Assistance Center.
X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
cVd the COMAND controller and press
opened via:
W to confirm.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance section
with the address entered. Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
i If you select No, the address can be stored
To do this, you will need your identification
in the address book. number and password.
i If you have sent more than one i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
destination address, each individual the corresponding mobile phone network
destination must be confirmed separately. is accessible.
i Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were Vehicle remote closing
sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz
The remote closing feature can be used when
vehicles with mbrace and active mbrace
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
accounts:
are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be
if multiple vehicles are registered under the locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
same e-mail address, the destination will Assistance Center.
be sent to all the vehicles.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
Vehicle remote opening turned off. After this time, the remote closing
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
a replacement SmartKey is not available. The remotely.
vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz X Contact the following service hotlines:
Customer Assistance Center. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
The vehicle can be immediately opened Assistance Center at
remotely within four days of the ignition being 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
turned off. After this time, the remote opening (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After RCanada: Customer Service at
30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened 1-888-923-8367
remotely. You will be asked for your PIN.
X Contact the following service hotlines:
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Z
258 Features
Locked Remotely message appears in the can use the received data to decide what kind
multifunction display. of assistance is required. You are then, for
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-
locked via: Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is
called.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Blackberry) center. You will see the Roadside
To do this, you will need your identification Assistance Connected message in the
number and password. COMAND display. If the vehicle remote
i The vehicle remote closing feature is malfunction diagnosis is able to be started,
available when the relevant mobile phone the Request for vehicle diagnosis
network is available and data connection is received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
possible. message appears in the display.
X Press Yes to confirm the message.
Stolen vehicle recovery service X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please
If your vehicle has been stolen: switch on ignition. message appears:

turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
X Notify the police. lock.
The police will issue a numbered incident X If the Please follow the
report.
instructions received by phone and
X This number will be forwarded to the
move your vehicle to a safe
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance position. message appears: follow the
Center together with your PIN. instructions of the customer service
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance representative.
Center then attempts to locate the mbrace The message in the display disappears.
system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
Assistance Center contacts you and the
malfunction diagnosis is canceled
local law enforcement agency if the vehicle
completely.
is located. However, only the law
enforcement agency is informed of the The vehicle operating state check begins.
location of the vehicle. Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis
activated message appears.
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
When the check is finished, the Sending
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice
Benz Customer Assistance center is connection may be interrupted
automatically informed. during data transfer.) message
appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis the Customer Assistance center.
With the vehicle remote malfunction X Press OK to confirm the message.
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the The voice connection with the Customer
Customer Assistance center can provide Assistance center is terminated.
improved support for problems with your The Vehicle Diagnosis:
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data Transferring data... appears.
is transferred to the Customer Assistance
center. The customer service representative

Features 259
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer XTo start route guidance: select Yes.
Assistance center. An overview of the route is shown in the
Depending on what the customer service display.
representative agreed with you, the voice i If you select No, the saved route can be
connection is re-established after the transfer called up later in the navigation menu.
is complete. If necessary, you will be X Select Start.
contacted at a later time by another means, Route guidance is started.
e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote i Downloaded and saved data can be called

malfunction diagnosis include, for example: up again in COMAND.
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer You can find further information in the
Assistance center. If a service is overdue, separate COMAND operating instructions.
the COMAND display shows a message
about various special offers at your Speed alert
workshop. You can define the upper speed limit, which
Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a
etc. If applicable, you will receive message will be sent to the Customer
information on special offers in the E-Mail. Assistance center. The Customer Assistance
USA only: this information can also be center then forwards this information to you.
called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive
www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options
Information on the data stored in the vehicle include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
(Y page 25). The data which is sent to the Customer
Information on roadside assistance Assistance center contains the following
(Y page 22). information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was
Downloading routes exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was
system. To do this, an SD memory card must
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no exceeded
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing
system before saving. Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
A route can be prepared and sent either by a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
customer service representative or via the be informed if the vehicle crosses the
mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can boundaries of the selected areas. You can
include up to 20 way points. When a route has select the way in which you receive this
been received by the navigation system, the information beforehand. Possible options
'Route name' has been saved to include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
memory card. Do you want to start The area can be determined as either a circle
route guidance? message appears on the or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
COMAND display. The route is saved to the You can specify up to ten areas
SD memory card.
Z
260 Features
simultaneously. Different settings are to operate up to three different door and gate
possible for each area. systems.
USA only: these settings can be called up Only operate garage doors using the
under "Owners Online" at http:// integrated garage door opener if:
www.mbusa.com. Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call reverse feature, and
and inform the customer service Rthey conform to the current U.S. safety
representative that you wish to activate geo standards.
fencing.
When programming a garage door opener,

Currently inactive areas can be activated by park vehicle outside the garage.
SMS.
i Certain garage door drives are
Triggering the vehicle alarm incompatible with the integrated garage
door opener. If you have difficulty
With this function, you can trigger the programming the integrated garage door
vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Benz Center.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
Alternatively, you can call the following
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
telephone assistance services:
alarm switches off.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
Garage door opener 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Important safety notes 1-800-387-0100
G WARNING RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
When you operate or program the garage door (free of charge)

with the integrated garage door opener, More information on HomeLink® and/or
persons in the range of movement of the compatible products is also available
garage door can become trapped or struck by online at http://www.homelink.com.
the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
i Notes on the declaration of conformity
When using the integrated garage door (Y page 23).
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
Programming
door.
Programming buttons
G WARNING Observe the "Important safety notes"
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust (Y page 260).
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener

integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you

Features 261
X Press and hold button B on remote control

A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been
successful.
X Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the

corresponding button on the rear-view
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
mirror between remote control A and the rear-
Garage door remote control A is not part of view mirror.
the integrated garage door opener.
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
X The first time before programming, clear
successful programming, the garage door
the integrated garage door opener memory system is using a rolling code. After
(Y page 263). programming, you must synchronize the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the garage door opener integrated in the rear-
ignition lock. view mirror with the receiver of the garage
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on door system.
Synchronizing the rolling code
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 260).
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
the first time. If the selected button has that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
already been programmed, indicator objects are present within the sweep of the
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten door or gate.
seconds have elapsed.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator ignition lock.
lamp : flashes yellow. X Press the program button of the door or
X Point garage door remote control A gate drive (see the door or gate drive
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view operating instructions, e.g. under
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to "programming of additional remote
20 cm). controls").
i The required distance between remote i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
control A and the integrated garage door initiate the next step.
opener depends on the garage door drive X Press previously programmed button ;,
system. Several attempts might be = or ? of the integrated garage door
necessary. You should test every position opener until the door closes.
for at least 25 seconds before trying The rolling code synchronization is then
another position. complete.
Z
262 Features
Notes on programming the remote The integrated garage door opener is

control compatible with devices that have units
Canadian radio frequency laws require a which operate in the frequency range of
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission 280to 433MHz.
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. RReplace the batteries in garage door
Therefore, these signals may not last long remote control A. This increases the
enough for the integrated garage door likelihood that garage door remote control
opener. The signal is not recognized during A will transmit a strong and precise signal
programming. Comparable with Canadian to the integrated garage door opener in the
law, some U.S. garage door openers also rear-view mirror.

feature a "break". RWhen programming, hold remote control
Proceed as follows: A at varying distances and angles from the
Rif you live in Canada button that you are programming. Try
Rif you have difficulties programming the various angles at a distance between 2and
garage door opener (regardless of where 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
you live) when using the programming but at varying distances.
steps RIf another remote control for the same
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on garage door drive is available, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control. Before performing these steps,
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
make sure that new batteries have been
up yellow.
installed in garage door drive remote
X Release the button.
control A.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RNote that some remote controls only
X Press button B of garage door remote
transmit for a limited amount of time (the
control A for two seconds, then release it indicator lamp on the remote control goes
for two seconds. out). Press button B on remote control
X Press button B again for two seconds. A again before transmission ends.
X Repeat this sequence on button B of RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
remote control A until indicator lamp : opener unit. This can improve signal
lights up green. reception/transmission.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
process. Opening/closing the garage door
X Continue with the other programming After it has been programmed, the integrated
steps (see above). garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Problems when programming Please also read the operating instructions
If you are experiencing problems for the garage door system.
programming the integrated garage door X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
ignition lock.
the following instructions:
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage programmed to operate the garage door.
door drive remote control A. This can Garage door system with a fixed code:
usually be found on the back of the remote indicator lamp : lights up green.
control.

Features 263
Garage door system with a rolling code: Setting the compass

indicator lamp : flashes green.
X Determine your position using the following
i The transmitter will transmit a signal as zone maps.
long as the button is pressed. The
transmission is halted after a maximum of
ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
if necessary.

Clearing the memory
ignition lock.
X Press buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
i Make sure that you clear the memory of
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle. North America zone map
Compass
Calling up the compass
The compass displays in which compass
direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
South America zone map
To receive a correct display in rear-view

mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
and the magnetic field zone set.
Z
264 Features
X Push a round pen into opening The operating and road safety of the vehicle
=(Y page 263) for approximately three is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
seconds. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
The zone currently selected appears in stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
compass display ;(Y page 263). the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
X To select the zone: push a round pen into securely and as specified in order to ensure
opening =(Y page 263) until the desired sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
zone is selected. loose floormats.
If, after a few seconds, the display in
compass display ;(Y page 263) changes

direction, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not X Slide the seat backwards.
in the vicinity of steel structures or high- X To install: place the floormat in the
voltage transmission lines.
footwell.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
X Press safety catch knobs : onto
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
retainers ;.
window defroster.
X To remove: pull the floormat off
Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
X Push a round pen into opening
=(Y page 263) for approximately six
seconds, until symbol C is shown in
compass display ;(Y page 263).
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 263).
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

265

Engine compartment ........................ 266
Maintenance ...................................... 270
Care .................................................... 271
Maintenance and care

266 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is
i This Operator's Manual describes all overheated or when there is a fire in the
models and all standard and optional engine compartment could expose you to hot
equipment of your vehicle available at the gases or other service products. There is a
time of publication of the Operator's risk of injury.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Let an overheated engine cool down before
possible. Please note that your vehicle may opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
not be equipped with all features engine compartment, keep the hood closed
described. This also applies to safety- and contact the fire department.
G WARNING

specialist workshops: (Y page 24). The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
Engine compartment again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
Hood
If you need to do any work inside the engine
Important safety notes compartment,
Rswitch off the ignition
G WARNING
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
risk of danger from moving components,
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
such as the fan rotation area
Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
G WARNING G WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
When opening and closing the hood, it may
system work under high voltage. If you touch
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
components which are under voltage, you
a risk of injury to persons within range of
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
movement of the hood.
injury.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
Never touch components of the ignition
within its range of movement.
system or fuel injection system when the
ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator Opening the hood
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
G WARNING
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
When the hood is open and the windshield
poses a risk of injury.
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
Where possible, let the engine cool down and by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
touch only the components described in the
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
following.
the ignition before opening the hood.

Engine compartment 267
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
not folded away from the windshield. You X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into
could otherwise damage the windshield yellow retaining clip =.
wipers or the hood.
Closing the hood
X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellow
retaining clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it
into bracket A until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
switched off. properly engaged. Do not press the hood
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
closed. Open the hood again and close it
with a little more force.
The hood is released.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
X
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
Reach into the gap between the hood and
be in a different location.
the radiator trim and press hood catch
lever ; to the left. When checking the oil level:
X Raise the hood. Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Z
268 Engine compartment
Checking the oil level using the oil Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
dipstick Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
Example ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide engine oil can result in damage to the
tube. engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. excess engine oil siphoned off.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
Adding engine oil

G WARNING Example: engine oil cap
If engine oil comes into contact with hot X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
components in the engine compartment, it it.
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Add engine oil.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the of engine oil.
components before starting the engine. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
H Environmental note Ensure that the cap locks into place
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If securely.
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful X Check the oil level again with the oil
to the environment. dipstick (Y page 268).
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that Further information on engine oil
have been approved for vehicles with a (Y page 332).
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the

Engine compartment 269
Checking and adding other service X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
products clockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
Checking coolant level X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
G WARNING remove it.

The engine cooling system is pressurized, If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
particularly when the engine is warm. When = in the filler neck when cold, there is
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot enough coolant in coolant expansion
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. tank ;.
Let the engine cool down before opening the X If necessary, add coolant that has been
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
turn to allow pressure to escape. as it will go.
! The coolant may only be checked and For further information on coolant, see
corrected when the engine is cool (coolant (Y page 333).
temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †).
Checking the coolant when the coolant Adding washer fluid to the windshield
temperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may washer system/headlamp cleaning
result in damage to the engine or to the system
engine cooling system.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Example
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the
vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
Example
X Check the coolant temperature display in
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below X Add the premixed washer fluid.
104 ‡ (40 †). X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
X Turn the SmartKey to position until it engages.
0 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.
Z
270 Maintenance
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the time during which the battery is
windshield washer system and the headlamp disconnected.
cleaning system. Maintaining the time-dependent service
The recommended minimum amount when schedule:
topping up is 1 liter. If the water level drops X Note down the service due date displayed
below this, a message appears in the
in the multifunction display before
multifunction display prompting you to refill
disconnecting the battery.
the washer fluid (Y page 223).
or
Further information on windshield washer
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 334).
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Maintenance
Hiding a service message
ASSYST PLUS
X Press % or a.
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Displaying service messages
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
X Using = or ;, select the Serv.
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet). menu.
X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). The service due date appears in the
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
Information about Service
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 267). Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
The multifunction display shows a service interval display
message for several seconds, e.g.: ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
RNext Service A in .. Days display has been inadvertently reset, this
RService A Due setting can be corrected at a qualified
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Have service work carried out as described
Depending on the operating conditions of the
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
otherwise lead to increased wear and
the next service due date is displayed.
damage to the major assemblies or the
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with vehicle.
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
a major service. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
You can obtain further information from an after the service work has been carried out.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can also obtain further information on
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display maintenance work, for example.
does not take into account any periods of

Care 271
Special service requirements Do not scrub.

The specified maintenance interval takes only Do not touch the surfaces or protective
the normal operation of the vehicle into films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
account. Under arduous operating conditions scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
or increased load on the vehicle, damage the surfaces and protective film.
maintenance work must be carried out more
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
frequently, for example:
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
Rregular city driving with frequent after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
intermediate stops cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel increased corrosion of the brake discs and
short distances brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road should drive for a few minutes after
surfaces cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
Rif the engine is often left idling for long the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
periods The vehicle can then be parked.
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter retaining the quality in the long term.
replaced or changed more frequently. Under Use care products and cleaning agents
arduous operating conditions, the tires must recommended and approved by Mercedes-
be checked more often. Further information Benz.
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Exterior care
Driving abroad Automatic car wash
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
G WARNING
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Care conditions until full braking power is restored.
General notes ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

H Environmental note automatically in certain situations. To
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
cloths in an environmentally responsible DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
manner. the following or other similar situations:
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following: Rin the car wash
Rdry, rough or hard cloths ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless

Rabrasive cleaning agents Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rsolvents cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Z
272 Care
! Make sure that the automatic X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
transmission is in position N when washing thoroughly with a chamois.
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
vehicle could be damaged if the paintwork.
transmission is in another position.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
! Make sure that: traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof soon as possible.
are fully closed.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off Power washers
(the OFF button has been pressed/the
G WARNING
airflow control is set to position 0).
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
0. to the tires or chassis components.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. Components damaged in this way may fail
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
wash from the very start. Do not use power washers with circular jet
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. tires or chassis components replaced
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off immediately.
wax from the windshield and the wiper
! Always maintain a distance of at least
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
wiping noises caused by residue on the
power washer nozzle. Information about
windshield.
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Washing by hand
Move the power washer nozzle around
In some countries, washing by hand is only when cleaning your vehicle.
allowed at wash bays that are specially Do not aim directly at any of the following:
designed for this purpose. Observe the legal
Rtires
requirements in all countries concerned.
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
Relectrical components
vehicle in direct sunlight.
Rbattery
X Use a soft sponge to clean.
Rconnectors
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rlights
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a Rseals

gentle jet of water. Rtrim
X Do not point the water jet directly towards Rventilation slots
the air inlet. Damaged seals or electrical components
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the can lead to leaks or failures.
sponge frequently.

Care 273
Cleaning the wheels Rareas affected by corrosion

Rdamage caused by inadequate care
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage In such cases, visit a qualified specialist
wheel bolts and brake components. workshop.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
surface, use the paint care products
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
Benz. This is the case approximately every
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
three to five months, depending on the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
climate conditions and the care product used.
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or

cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and if the paintwork has become dull, then the
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. paintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,
The vehicle can then be parked. please use the paint cleaner recommend and
approved by Mercedes Benz.
Cleaning the paintwork Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
! Do not affix:
Rstickers Matte finish care
Rfilms
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
Rmagnetic plates or similar items wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise shine.
damage the paintwork. ! The following may cause the paint to
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, become shiny and thus reduce the matte
while avoiding rubbing too hard. effect:
X Soak insect remains with insect remover RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. materials.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse RFrequent use of car washes.
off the treated areas afterwards. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
lighter fluid. wax. These products are only suitable for
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to at a qualified specialist workshop.
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
The following cannot always be completely
treatment under any circumstances.
repaired:
Rscratches
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
Rcorrosive deposits damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
treatment.
Z
274 Care
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels Cleaning wiper blades
with a clear matte finish.
G WARNING
i The vehicle should preferably be washed You could become trapped by the windshield
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
and plenty of water. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo injury.
from the range of recommended and Always switch off the windshield wipers and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
Cleaning the windows
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
G WARNING the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,

You could become trapped by the windshield you will damage the hood.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
the wiper blade could be damaged.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
wiper blades. graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, the windshield.
you will damage the hood. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, damp cloth.
solvents or cleaning agents containing X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
solvents to clean the inside of the windows. before switching on the ignition.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging back. The windshield could be damaged if
the windows. the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
Cleaning the exterior lighting
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
and pollen may under certain cloths which are suitable for plastic light
circumstances prevent water from draining lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
away. This can lead to corrosion damage cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
and damage to electronic components. the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the inside and outside of the X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
product that is recommended and cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
approved by Mercedes-Benz. shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Care 275
Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

camera lens :.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power Cleaning the exhaust pipe
washer, make sure that you keep a ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between based cleaning agents such as sanitary
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Information about the correct distance is X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
available from the equipment
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
manufacturer.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems cleaning agents
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
Cleaning the rear view camera when cleaning. This could lead to
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area irreparable damage to the display.
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Z
276 Care
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that Cleaning genuine wood and trim
it is switched off and has cooled down. elements
X Clean the display surface using a
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
commercially available microfiber cloth such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
and TFT/LCD display cleaner. polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
X Dry the display surface using a dry of damaging the surface.
microfiber cloth.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
Cleaning the plastic trim mostly made of anodized aluminum and
G WARNING can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
Care products and cleaning agents containing

when cleaning the trim pieces.
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
come loose in the event of air bag dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
deployment. There is a risk of injury. are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
Do not use any care products and cleaning
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
agents to clean the cockpit.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
! Do not affix the following to plastic a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
surfaces: cloth.
Rstickers X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Rfilms products recommended and approved by
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
Mercedes-Benz.
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
Cleaning the seat covers
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the General notes
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
look of the surfaces. genuine leather, artificial leather or
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. damage the cover.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning i Note that regular care is essential to
products recommended and approved by ensure that the appearance and comfort of
Mercedes-Benz. the covers is retained over time.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
selector lever example:
RDifferences in the texture
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
RSigns of stretching and marking
leather care agents that have been
recommended and approved by Mercedes- RSlight nuances of color
Benz. These are characteristics of leather and not

material defects.

Care 277
! To retain the natural appearance of the by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡

leather, observe the following cleaning (80 †) or in direct sunlight.
instructions: X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
RClean genuine leather covers carefully solution.
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth. Cleaning the headliner and carpets
RMake sure that the leather does not
X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked. or a cleaning agent recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes- X Carpets: use the carpet and textile

Benz. You can obtain these from a cleaning agents recommended and
qualified specialist workshop. approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Seat covers of other materials

! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
Z
278

279

Where will I find...? ........................... 280
Flat tire .............................................. 281
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 285
Jump-starting .................................... 289
Towing and tow-starting .................. 291
Fuses .................................................. 294
Breakdown assistance

280 Where will I find...?
Useful information i Check the expiration date on first-aid kit

= at least once a year. Replace the
i This Operator's Manual describes all contents if necessary, and replace missing
models and all standard and optional items.
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are Vehicle tool kit
General notes
described. This also applies to safety- Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit
related systems and functions. is in the stowage well beneath the cargo
i Read the information on qualified compartment floor.
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
change tool kit is in the stowage well beneath
the cargo compartment floor.

Where will I find...? i Apart from certain country-specific
First-aid kit variations, the vehicles are not equipped
with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for
changing a wheel are specific to the
vehicle. For more information on which
tools are required and approved to perform
a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench
X To open the stowage compartment: turn Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
rotary knob : clockwise and fold down
cover ;.
: Tire inflation compressor

; Towing eye
X Remove first-aid kit =. = Tire sealant filler bottle

Flat tire 281
X Open the tailgate. X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up Make sure that they are not endangered as
(Y page 246). they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
i Towing eye ; is located under tire area while a wheel is being changed.
inflation compressor :. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit behind the barrier.
X X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
Open the tailgate.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up
traffic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
(Y page 246).
X Remove the tire-change tool kit. i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
The tire-change tool kit contains: are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
RJack
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
RLug wrench TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
ROne pair of gloves feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
RFolding wheel chock A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
Preparing the vehicle properties)
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
General notes
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 281) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 280)
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
Information on changing/mounting a wheel You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
(Y page 319). MOExtended marking which appears on the
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
level ground, as far away as possible from next to the tire size designation, the load-
traffic. bearing capacity and the speed index
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. (Y page 313).
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away MOExtended tires may only be used in
(Y page 149). conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the warning system.
straight-ahead position. If the pressure loss warning message
X Switch off the engine. appears in the multifunction display:
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition RObserve the instructions in the display
lock. messages (Y page 219).
RCheck the tire for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.

282 Flat tire
The maximum driving distance is cornering, accelerating quickly and when

approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the braking. There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle is partially laden and approximately Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
laden. and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
distance possible depends upon: vehicle.
RSpeed Stop driving in emergency mode if:
RRoad condition Ryou hear banging noises.
ROutside temperature Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
may be reduced by extreme driving RESP® is intervening constantly.
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

through a moderate style of driving.
The maximum permissible distance which After driving in emergency mode, have the
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
the moment the tire pressure loss warning workshop with regard to their further use. The
appears in the multifunction display. defective tire must be replaced in every case.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
TIREFIT kit
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires: Important safety notes
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and G WARNING
Rmarked "MOExtended" In the following situations, the tire sealant is
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be unable to provide sufficient breakdown
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire
standard tire may be used as a temporary properly:
measure. Make sure that you use the Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
proper size and type (summer or winter than those mentioned above.
tire). Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the or on a flat tire.
factory. It is therefore recommended that There is a risk of an accident.
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes
irritation. It must not come into contact with
your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.
G WARNING Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant
When driving in emergency mode, the driving away from children. There is a risk of injury.
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when

Flat tire 283
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
observe the following: the driver's field of vision.
RRinse X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water. valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the
bottom section of the tire inflation
Using the TIREFIT kit compressor housing.
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up the mounting on yellow cap A of tire
to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire sealant bottle : until the plug engages.
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the
mounting of tire inflation compressor ;
until the cap and both hooks engage.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part

X Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
nails.
tire.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the
X Screw filler hose D onto valve.
accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire
inflation compressor from the stowage well X Insert plug = into the socket of the
underneath the cargo compartment floor cigarette lighter (Y page 250) or into a 12 V
(Y page 280). power socket in your vehicle (Y page 250).
Z
284 Flat tire
XPress on/off switch ? on the tire inflation G WARNING

compressor to ON. If the required tire pressure is not reached
The tire inflation compressor is switched after the specified time, the tire is too badly
on. The tire is inflated. damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
The pressure can briefly rise to pressure that is too low can significantly
approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). impair the vehicle's braking and driving
Do not switch off the tire inflation characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
compressor during this phase. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a specialist workshop.
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least Tire pressure reached
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
G WARNING
! Do not operate the tire inflation A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
compressor for longer than ten minutes at impairs the driving characteristics and is not
a time without a break. It may otherwise suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
overheat. accident.
The tire inflation compressor can be You should therefore adapt your driving style
operated again once it has cooled down. accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tire that
been attained after a maximum of after ten has been repaired using tire sealant.
minutes, see (Y page 284).
! After use, excess tire sealant may run out
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
of the filler hose. This could cause stains.
not been attained after a maximum of ten
minutes, see (Y page 284). Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
can then be removed like a layer of film. H Environmental note
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. workshop.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)

Tire pressure not reached has been achieved after ten minutes:
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
not been achieved after ten minutes: X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. the faulty tire.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
the faulty tire. inflation compressor.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
X Pull away immediately.
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ instrument cluster in the driver's field of
29 psi). vision.

Battery (vehicle) 285
X Stop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the
impair the vehicle's braking and driving tire inflation compressor, press together
characteristics. There is a risk of accident. the locking tabs on the yellow cap.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
specialist workshop. inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least sealant bottle.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,
see the Tire and Loading Information X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
placard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire inflation compressor.
pressure table on the fuel filler flap). X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on workshop and have the tire changed there.
the tire inflation compressor. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler
hose replaced as soon as possible at a
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Special tools and expert knowledge are
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress required when working on the battery, e.g.
pressure release button : next to removal and installing. You should therefore
pressure gauge ;. have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit and
damage your vehicle's electronic system. This
can disrupt driving safety systems such as
ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program).
Z
286 Battery (vehicle)
RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock RIt is important that you observe the
during braking. This limits the steerability described order of the battery terminals
of the vehicle when braking and the braking when connecting and disconnecting a
distance may increase. There is a risk of battery.
accident. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be battery poles with identical polarity are
stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel starts connected.
to spin. There is a risk of accident. RIt is particularly important to observe the
You should therefore have all work involving described order when connecting and
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist disconnecting the jumper cables.
workshop. RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation

of sparks, which could ignite the highly Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
an explosion. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle over the battery. Keep children away from
body to remove any existing electrostatic batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
build-up. water and seek medical attention.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump-
Batteries contain dangerous
starting.
substances. It is against the
Always make sure that neither you nor the law to dispose of them with
battery is electrostatically charged. There is the household rubbish. They
a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.: must be collected separately
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic and recycled to protect the
fibers environment.
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Dispose of batteries in an
Rif you push or pull the battery across the environmentally friendly
carpet or other synthetic materials manner. Take discharged
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth.
batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or a
G WARNING special collection point for
During the charging process, a battery used batteries.
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. qualified specialist workshop.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a Observe the service intervals in the
connected battery does not come into Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
contact with vehicle parts. specialist workshop for more information.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a ! You should have all work involving the
battery. battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is

Battery (vehicle) 287
necessary for you to disconnect the battery Keep children away.

yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. Check that all the indicator Observe this Operator's Manual.
lamps in the instrument cluster are off.
Otherwise, electronic components, such
as the alternator, may be damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
clamp and then the positive terminal recommends that you only use batteries
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. which have been tested and approved for
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These
system may be damaged. batteries provide increased impact
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
the transmission is locked in position P suffering acid burns should the battery be
after disconnecting the battery. The damaged in the event of an accident.
vehicle is secured against rolling away. In order for the battery to achieve the
You can then no longer move the vehicle. maximum possible service life, it must always
The battery and the cover of the positive be sufficiently charged.
terminal clamp must be installed securely Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
during operation. discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery
Comply with safety precautions and take
disconnected at a qualified specialist
protective measures when handling
workshop. You can also charge the battery
batteries.
with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
WARNING Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
for further information.
Have the battery charge level checked more
Fire, open flames and smoking are frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
prohibited when handling the short trips or if you leave it standing idle for
battery. Avoid creating sparks. a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
parked for a long period of time.
contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
in particular gloves, an apron and i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
a face mask. vehicle and do not require any electrical
Immediately rinse acid splashes consumers. The vehicle will then use very
off with clean water. Consult a little energy, thus conserving battery
doctor if necessary. power.
Wear eye protection.
Z
288 Battery (vehicle)
i If the power supply has been interrupted, X Open the hood (Y page 266).
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will X Connect the battery charger to the positive
have to: terminal and ground point in the same
Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND, order as when connecting the donor
see the separate operating instructions). battery in the jump-starting procedure
Rreset the function for folding the exterior (Y page 289).
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
the mirrors out once (Y page 93). warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case
Charging the battery you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. The service life of a
G WARNING thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
During charging and jump-starting, explosive starting characteristics can be impaired,
gases can escape from the battery. There is a particularly at low temperatures. Have the
risk of an explosion. thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating specialist workshop.
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient Only charge the installed battery with a
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. battery charger which has been tested and
Do not lean over a battery. approved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessory
battery charge unit specially adapted for
G WARNING Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. permits the charging of the battery in its
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean installed position. Contact an authorized
over the battery. Keep children away from Mercedes-Benz Center for further
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with information and availability. Read the battery
water and seek medical attention. charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a

maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 289).

Jump-starting 289
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
G WARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
Z
290 Jump-starting
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:

Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the hood (Y page 266).

Towing and tow-starting 291
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
started is greater than the permissible gross
G WARNING weight of your vehicle:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could
Rthe engine is not running. rollover.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the
or the vehicle's electrical system. permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 328).
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely. G WARNING
The vehicle is braked if the HOLD function is
activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the
vehicle is to be towed.
Z
292 Towing and tow-starting
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the Installing/removing the towing eye
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged. Installing the towing eye
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than

30 miles (50km), the front axle must be
raised or the entire vehicle raised and
transported.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage
! Vehicles with automatic transmission space.
must not be started by tow-starting. This The towing eye is beneath the cargo
could otherwise damage the transmission. compartment floor with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 280).
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed. Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing
eye is beneath the tire inflation
When towing a vehicle, the transmission must
compressor.
be in position N.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you: direction of the arrow.
X Take cover : off the opening.
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
X Screw in and tighten the towing eye
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the transmission to position
clockwise to the stop.
N.
Removing the towing eye
i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 198). You could otherwise be X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
locked out when pushing or towing the X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
vehicle. until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
beneath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 280) in the cargo compartment.
X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the
tire inflation compressor.

Towing and tow-starting 293
Towing the vehicle with the front axle The automatic transmission automatically
raised shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
! The ignition must be switched off if the the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
vehicle is being towed with the front axle to ensure that the automatic transmission
raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
damage the brake system. you must observe the following points:
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
X Release the electric parking brake.
ignition lock.
X Deactivate automatic locking
X Release the brake pedal.
(Y page 198).
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 101).
(Y page 101).
ignition lock and leave the SmartKey in the It is important that you observe the safety
ignition lock. instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 291).
When towing your vehicle with the front axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 291).
Transporting the vehicle
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
Towing a vehicle with both axles on or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
the ground such as axle or steering components.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
G WARNING
The power assistance for the steering and the
brake force booster do not work when the ignition lock.
engine is not running. You will then need X Shift the transmission to position N.
much more effort to brake and steer the As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
vehicle. Adapt your style of driving
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
accordingly.
applying the electric parking brake.
i In order to signal a change of direction X Shift the transmission to position P.
when towing with the hazard warning lamps X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
switched on, use the combination switch as ignition lock and remove it.
usual. In this case, only the turn signals for X Secure the vehicle.
the desired direction flash. When you reset
the combination switch, the hazard The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
warning lamps start flashing again. onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
Z
294 Fuses
Tow-starting (emergency engine Before changing a fuse

starting) X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
! Vehicles with automatic transmission (Y page 149).
must not be tow-started. You could X Switch off all electrical consumers.
otherwise damage the automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
transmission. ignition lock and remove it (Y page 135).
When tow-starting, it is important that you All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
observe the safety instructions (Y page 291). must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
Fuses
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
Important safety notes in the direction of travel
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell

G WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
you replace it with a fuse with a higher the front-passenger footwell (Y page 295).
amperage, the electric cables could be
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
is a risk of an accident and injury. Fuse box in the engine compartment
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified G WARNING
new fuses having the correct amperage. When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
! Only use fuses that have been approved by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
have the correct fuse rating for the system
the ignition before opening the hood.
concerned. Only use fuses marked with an
"S". Otherwise, components or systems ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
could be damaged. fuse box when the cover is open.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
components on the circuit and their functions
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
stop operating.
the operation of the fuses.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Fuses 295
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
X To release cover =, press retaining

clamp ;.
X Fold out cover = in the direction of the
arrow to the catch.
X Remove cover = forwards.
i Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the

X To close: check whether the seal is seated lower right-hand side of cover =.
correctly in cover :. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand
X Insert cover : at the back into openings side of the fuse box into the retainer.
= on the fuse box. Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover :. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock
X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and audibly.
close. X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell
X To open: remove the floormat from the

front-passenger side.
X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
Z
296

297

Important safety notes .................... 298
Operation ........................................... 298
Winter operation ............................... 300
Tire pressure ..................................... 301
Loading the vehicle .......................... 306
Maximum load rating ....................... 310
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .......................................... 311
Tire labeling ....................................... 312
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 316
Changing a wheel ............................. 319
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 323
Emergency spare wheel ................... 325
Wheels and tires

298 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and
i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics).
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your
Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
possible. Please note that your vehicle may used correctly can impair the operating
not be equipped with all features safety.
described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved
related systems and functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i Read the information on qualified workshop and inquire about:
specialist workshops: (Y page 24). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
(Y page 323).
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
Information on air pressure for the tires on

the wheel brakes or suspension components
your vehicle can be found:
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
accident. Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Always replace wheels and tires with those Information placard on the B-pillar
that fulfill the specifications of the original Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
part. flap
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Runder "Tire pressure"
correct: i Further information on wheels and tires
Rdesignation can be obtained at any qualified specialist
Rmodel workshop.
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Operation
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer Information on driving
Rmodel RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the
tire pressures and correct them if
G WARNING necessary.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
steering and braking characteristics of the noises and unusual handling
vehicle. There is a risk of accident. characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.
Tires without run-flat characteristics: This may indicate that the wheels or tires
Rdo
are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
not drive with a flat tire.
defective, reduce your speed immediately.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or check the wheels and tires for damage.
consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hidden tire damage could also be causing

Operation 299
the unusual handling characteristics. If you Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
find no signs of damage, have the wheels e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
and tires checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 301).
the tires do not get deformed by the curb The service life of tires depends, among other
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive things, on the following factors:
over curbs, speed humps or similar RDriving style
elevations, try to do so slowly and at an
RTire pressure
obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,
particularly the sidewalls, may be RDistance covered
damaged.
Tire tread
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING
G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Wheels and tires

accident. speed is not adapted to suit the driving
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage conditions. There is a risk of accident.
and replace any damaged tires immediately. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as should regularly check the tread depth and
well as after driving off-road or on rough the condition of the tread across the entire
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of width of all tires.
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to Minimum tire tread depth for:
damage such as:
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rcuts in the tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rpunctures
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rtears in the tires
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rbulges on tires
tire tread depth is reached.
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the

condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 299). If necessary, turn
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Z
300 Winter operation
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
into the tire tread. are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by factory. It is therefore recommended that
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire you additionally equip your vehicle with a
tread. They are visible once the tread depth TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
case, the tire is so worn that it must be A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
replaced. qualified specialist workshop.
Selecting, mounting and replacing Winter operation

tires General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
type and make. specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Exception: it is permissible to mount a Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
different type or make in the event of a flat section (Y page 319).
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 281).
Wheels and tires
Driving with summer tires

ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
RAfter mounting new tires, break in them in
braking power. Change the tires on your
at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at
(100 km), as they only reach their full very cold temperatures could cause cracks to
performance after this distance. form, thereby damaging the tires
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
tread depth, as this significantly reduces responsibility for this type of damage.
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the
latest, regardless of wear. M+S tires
G WARNING
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
properties) ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
pressure in one or more tires. in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
MOExtended tires may only be used in At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of
warning system and only on wheels tire are identified by the M+S marking.
specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
symbol in addition to the M+S marking
a flat tire (Y page 281).
provide the best possible grip in wintry road
conditions. Only these tires will allow driving

Tire pressure 301
safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to If you intend to mount snow chains, please
function optimally in winter. These tires have bear the following points in mind:
been developed specifically for driving in RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
snow. wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on wheel-tire combinations (Y page 323).
all wheels to maintain safe handling ROnly use snow chains when driving on
characteristics. roads completely covered by snow.
Always observe the maximum permissible Remove the snow chains as soon as
speed specified for the M+S tires you have possible when you come to a road that is
mounted. not snow-covered.
Once the winter tires are mounted: RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 305). snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to mount snow
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
chains.
system (Y page 305).
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
For more information on driving with the speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325). RWhen snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 172).
Wheels and tires

Snow chains i You may wish to deactivate
ESP®(Y page 62) when pulling away with
G WARNING snow chains installed. You can thereby
If snow chains are mounted on the rear allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion manner, achieving an increased driving
to the vehicle body or to chassis components. force (cutting action).
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
tires. There is a risk of an accident. For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325).
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear
wheels Tire pressure
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the
Tire pressure specifications
front wheels.
G WARNING
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
too high are associated with the following
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
hazards:
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels". Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
speeds.
recommends that you only use snow chains
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
that have been specially approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a unevenly, which can severely impair tire
corresponding standard of quality. traction.
Rthe driving, steering and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
There is a risk of accident.
Z
302 Tire pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures various operating conditions, i.e. differing
and check the pressure of all the tires load and speed conditions.
including the spare wheel:
i Specifications shown in the examples of
Rmonthly, at least tire pressure tables are for illustration
Rif the load changes purposes only. Tire pressure specifications
Rbefore beginning a long journey are vehicle-specific and may deviate from
Runder different operating conditions, e.g. the data shown here. Tire pressure
off-road driving specifications applicable to your vehicle
are located in your vehicle's tire pressure
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
table.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
Wheels and tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the

labels described here.
1.) Tire and Loading Information placard Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the for this vehicle by the factory
vehicle (Y page 306).
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
The Tire and Loading Information placard pressure information following is only valid
contains the recommended tire pressures for for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
are valid for the maximum permissible load table for different numbers of occupants and
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle amounts of luggage. The actual number of
speed. seats may differ.
: Recommended tire pressures Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
of the fuel filler flap. diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
The tire pressure table contains the R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and
recommended pressures for cold tires for

Tire pressure 303
can be found on the tire sidewall G WARNING

(Y page 313). If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the

If the tire pressures have been set to the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower does not permit any reliable conclusion about
road speeds, the pressures should be reset the tire pressure.
to the higher values: The tire temperature and pressure increase
Rif you want to drive with an increased load when the vehicle is in motion. This is
and/or dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Wheels and tires

Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. Therefore, you should only correct tire
pressures when the tires are cold.
i The tire pressures for increased loads
The tires are cold:
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative Rif the vehicle has been parked without
effect on driving comfort. direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure. than 1 mile (1.6 km)
For more information, contact a qualified The tire temperature changes depending on
specialist workshop. the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
Important notes on tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when
G WARNING checking the pressure of warm tires. Only
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire current operating conditions. If you check the
pressure that is too low may result in a tire tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. resulting value will be higher than if the tires
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
valve is leaking.
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
304 Tire pressure
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rbe more susceptible to damage
cold tires: Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rincrease the braking distance
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of Maximum tire pressures
the fuel filler flap Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
Underinflated or overinflated tires when adjusting the tire pressure
Underinflation (Y page 301).
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Wheels and tires
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may: : Example: maximum permissible tire

Rwear quickly and unevenly pressure
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
Roverheat, leading to tire defects specific and may deviate from the values in
Rhave an adverse effect on handling the illustration.
characteristics
Checking the tire pressures
Overinflation
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst Observe the "Tire pressure information"
because they are damaged more easily by section (Y page 301).
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they Information on air pressure for the tires on
also suffer from irregular wear, which can your vehicle can be found:
severely impair the braking properties and the Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an Information placard on the B-pillar
accident. Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the flap
tires, including the spare wheel. Rin the "Tire pressure information" section
Overinflated tires may:

Rhave an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Rwear quickly and unevenly

Tire pressure 305
Checking tire pressures manually The tire pressure loss warning system is not
able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure,
To determine and set the correct tire
e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign
pressure, proceed as follows:
object. In the event of a sudden loss of
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking
be checked. carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto The function of the tire pressure loss warning
the valve. system is limited or delayed if:
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's
the recommended value on the Tire and tires.
Loading Information placard on the Rroad conditions are wintry.
B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
the recommended value (Y page 301).
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
high rates of acceleration).
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire vehicle or on the roof).
pressure gauge.
Wheels and tires

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Tire pressure loss warning system Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of pressures are set properly on all four tires
the wheels. This enables the system to detect for the respective operating conditions.
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed The recommended tire pressures can be
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of found in the table on the fuel filler flap.
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning The tire pressure loss warning system can
message will appear in the multifunction only give reliable warnings if you have set
display. the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire
The tire pressure warning system does not pressure is set, these incorrect values will
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. be monitored.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire X Observe the notes on tire pressure
pressure (Y page 301). (Y page 301).

The tire pressure loss warning system does X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
not replace the need to regularly check your position 2 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.
vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of
pressure on several tires at the same time
cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss
warning system.
Z
306 Loading the vehicle
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
to select the Service menu. exceeding the maximum load.
Tire Pressure.
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message
If you wish to confirm the restart:
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
X Press the 9 or : button to select : B-pillar, driver's side
Yes. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
X Press the a button. the maximum possible load.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
message appears in the multifunction
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
display.
Wheels and tires
Tire and Loading Information placard

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure shows the maximum permissible number
loss warning system will monitor the set of occupants and the maximum
tire pressures of all four tires. permissible vehicle load. It also contains
or details of the tire sizes and
If you wish to cancel the restart: corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
X Press the % button.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
or B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message identification plate informs you of the
appears, use the 9 or : button to gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
select Cancel. of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
X Press the a button. occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
The tire pressure values stored at the last can also find information about the
restart will continue to be monitored. maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
Loading the vehicle the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
Instruction labels for tires and loads exceed the maximum load or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
G WARNING front or rear axle.
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of

Loading the vehicle 307
Maximum permissible gross vehicle travel in the vehicle. This information can be
weight rating found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Step-by-step instructions
Information placard: "The combined weight The following steps have been developed as
of occupants and cargo should never required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Wheels and tires

load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
applicable) must not exceed the specified X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
value. combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
Loading Information placard in the
placard.
illustration are examples. The maximum
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
permissible load is vehicle-specific and
may deviate from the data shown here. The the driver and passengers that will be riding
maximum permissible load that applies for in your vehicle.
your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
Tire and Loading Information placard. the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
Number of seats available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there are five
occupants in the vehicle each with a weight
of 150 lbs, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400
Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Maximum number of seats : indicates the X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
maximum number of occupants allowed to be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
Z
308 Loading the vehicle
will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to

this Operator's Manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle
(Y page 310).
Wheels and tires

Loading the vehicle 309
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 307).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
Wheels and tires

and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Z
310 Maximum load rating

Step 3 Permissible load and 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
trailer load/ (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
noseweight Ò750 lbs Ò540 lbs Ò150 lbs (68 kg)
(maximum (340 kg) = (245 kg) = = 1350 lbs
permissible load 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) (612 kg)
rating from the Tire
and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate 10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailer
and its load.
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle Maximum load rating
Wheels and tires
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can

be found on the vehicle identification plate on Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle specified load limit. The maximum
(Y page 306). permissible load can be found on the
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
load and trailer load/noseweight (if (Y page 306).
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge. Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
Trailer load/noseweight
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross specific and may deviate from the values in
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the illustration.
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually between

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 311
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear

Standards
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Overview of Tire Quality Grading based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Standards under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm, due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are

U.S. government specifications. Their Traction
purpose is to provide drivers with uniform G WARNING
Wheels and tires

reliable information on tire performance data. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using based on straight-ahead braking traction
three performance factors: tread wear :, tests, and does not include acceleration,
tire traction ;, and heat resistance =. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
These regulations do not apply to Canada. characteristics.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
All passenger car tires must conform to the the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
statutory safety requirements in addition to measured under controlled conditions on
these grades. specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Where applicable, the tire grading and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
information can be found on the tire sidewall traction performance.
between the tread shoulder and maximum The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
tire width. road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
You should pay special attention to road
specific and may deviate from the values in
conditions when temperatures are around
the illustration.
the freezing point.
For example: Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
Treadwear Traction Temperature tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter
tires (Y page 300) to maintain normal driving
200 AA A characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
Z
312 Tire labeling
not covered with ice or snow. Take Tire labeling

appropriate care when driving.
Overview of tire labeling
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C. These represent the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its
Wheels and tires
The following markings are on the tire in addition

ability to dissipate heat when tested under to the tire name (sales designation) and the
controlled conditions on a specified indoor manufacturer's name:
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high : Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard
temperature can cause the material of the tire (Y page 316)
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ; DOT, Tire Identification Number
excessive temperature can lead to sudden (Y page 315)
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level = Maximum tire load (Y page 310)
of performance which all passenger car tires ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 304)
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle A Manufacturer
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the B Tire material (Y page 316)
laboratory test wheel than the minimum C Tire size designation, load-bearing
required by law. capacity and speed index (Y page 313)
D Load index (Y page 315)
E Tire name
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 313
Tire size designation, load-bearing ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
capacity and speed rating the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
: Tire width
specified in inches (in).
; Nominal aspect ratio in % Load bearing index: load bearing index A
= Tire code is a numerical code which specifies the
? Rim diameter maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
A Load bearing index Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
Wheels and tires

B Speed rating
permissible load can be found on the
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
deviate from the data in the example. placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
General: depending on the manufacturer's (Y page 306).
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall Example:
may not contain any letters or may contain A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a
one letter that precedes the size description. maximum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be
If there is no letter preceding the size carried by the tires. For further information on
description (as shown above): these are the maximum tire load in kilograms and
passenger vehicle tires according to pounds, see (Y page 310).
European manufacturing standards. For further information on the load-bearing
If "P" precedes the size description: these are index, see Load index (Y page 315).
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
manufacturing standards. approved maximum speed of the tire.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. G WARNING
manufacturing standards. Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing
capacity and the approved maximum speed
If "T" precedes the size description: these are
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
There is a risk of accident.
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
emergency. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire load rating and speed rating required for
tire width in millimeters.
your vehicle.
Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and the tire Regardless of the speed rating, always
width and is shown in percent. The aspect observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
Z
314 Tire labeling
adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in
conditions. brackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).
The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the
Summer tires
maximum speed of the tire is over 186mph
Index Speed rating (300km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer
about the maximum speed.
Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)
All-weather tires and winter tires
R up to 106mph (170 km/h)
Index Speed rating
S up to 112mph (180 km/h)
Q M+S6 up to 100mph (160 km/h)
T up to 118mph (190 km/h)
T M+S6 up to 118mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130mph (210 km/h)
H M+S6 up to 130mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149mph (240 km/h)
V M+S6 up to 149mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires.
Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S
Wheels and tires
ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h) identification, the i snow flake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Tires with this marking
ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)
fulfill the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in regarding the tire traction on snow. They
the size description, depending on the have been especially developed for driving
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). on snow.
The service specifications consist of load
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
bearing index A and speed rating B.
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph
RIf the size description of your tire includes (210km/h).
"ZR" and there are no service The speed rating of tires mounted at the
specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in factory may be higher than the maximum
order to find out the maximum speed. speed that the electronic speed limiter
If a service specification is available, the permits.
maximum speed is limited according to the Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating in the service specification. speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this required speed rating for your vehicle can be
example, "97 Y" is the service specification. found in the "Tires" section (Y page 323).
The letter "Y" represents the speed rating
Further information about reading tire data
and the maximum speed of the tire is
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
limited to 186 mph (300km/h).
workshop.
RThe size description for all tires with
maximum speeds of over 186mph
(300km/h) must include "ZR", and the
6 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 315
Load index The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or
retreaders to notify customers of recalls or
other safety-related matters. It makes it
possible for the purchaser to easily identify
the affected tires.
The TIN consists of the manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the Canadian
In addition to the load bearing index, load Transport Ministry.
index : may be imprinted after the letters Manufacturer identification code:
that identify speed index B(Y page 313) on manufacturer identification code ; provides
the sidewall of the tire. details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
example above), represents a standard tires have a code with four symbols.
load (SL) tire Further information about retreaded tires
Wheels and tires

RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced (Y page 298).
tire Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be
RC, D, E: represents a load range that used by the manufacturer as a code to
depends on the maximum load that the tire describe specific characteristics of the tire.
can carry at a certain pressure Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may A provides information about the age of a
deviate from the data in the example. tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
deviate from the data in the example.
Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every

new tire manufacturer or retreader has to
imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
produced.
Z
316 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire characteristics Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the
vehicle is designed multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lb).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
This information describes the tire cord and
government testing procedures. The ratings
the number of layers in sidewall : and under
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
tire tread ;.
deviate from the data in the example. Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure applies to
Wheels and tires
the tires mounted at the factory.

Definition of terms for tires and
The Tire and Loading Information placard
loading
contains the recommended tire pressures for
Tire ply composition and material cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
used maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the
Describes the number of plies or the number
recommended pressures for cold tires for
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
load and speed conditions.
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment
Metric unit for tire pressure.
This is the combined weight of all standard
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
and optional equipment available for the
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
1 bar.
installed on the vehicle or not.
DOT (Department of Transportation)

Rim
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
the Canadian Transport Ministry.
is mounted.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 317
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Kilopascal (kPa)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
rating. The actual load on an axle must never corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the
gross axle weight rating can be found on the equivalent of 1 bar.
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
Speed rating
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
The speed rating is part of the tire of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
identification. It specifies the speed range for capacity more precisely.
which the tire is approved.
Curb weight
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The weight of a vehicle with standard
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight equipment including the maximum capacity
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
Wheels and tires

wheel, accessories installed, occupants, conditioning system and optional equipment
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not not include passengers or luggage.
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
as specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating in kilograms or
pounds is the maximum weight for which a
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
tire is approved.
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories, Maximum permissible tire pressure
occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
tire.
weight rating is specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
Maximum loaded vehicle weight by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
Rthe weight of the accessories PSI (pounds per square inch)
Rthe load limit A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Z
318 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Aspect ratio optional extras, such as high-performance

brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
Relationship between tire height and tire performance battery, are not included in the
width in percent. curb weight and the weight of the
accessories.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an TIN (Tire Identification Number)
outward force to each square inch of the tire's This is a unique identifier which can be used
surface. The tire pressure is specified in by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal example for a product recall, and thus identify
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
be corrected when the tires are cold. manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Tire pressure of cold tires
The tires are cold: Load bearing index
Rif the vehicle has been parked without The load bearing index (also load index) is a
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three code that contains the maximum load bearing
Wheels and tires
hours and capacity of a tire.

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
Tread tires and the road surface.
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
Bead distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
securely on the wheel. There are several steel (1.6 mm) has been reached.
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
Sidewall their designated seating positions.
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus
Weight of optional extras 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the
The combined weight of those optional extras number of seats in the vehicle.
that weigh more than the replaced standard
part and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

Changing a wheel 319
Changing a wheel if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss

warning system.
Flat tire
You can find information on what to do in the
event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section Direction of rotation
(Y page 281). You will also find information Tires with a specified direction of rotation
on driving with MOExtended tires in the event have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of a flat tire. of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare maintained.
wheel is mounted as described under An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 319). its correct direction of rotation.
Rotating the wheels Storing wheels

G WARNING Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
severely impair the driving characteristics if tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Wheels and tires

the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of Cleaning the wheels
accident.
G WARNING
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
and tires are of the same dimensions.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Always pay attention to the instructions and to the tires or chassis components.
safety notes when changing a wheel Components damaged in this way may fail
(Y page 319). unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires Do not use power washers with circular jet
differ, depending on the operating conditions. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern tires or chassis components replaced
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically immediately.
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you Mounting a wheel
can rotate the wheels according to the Preparing the vehicle
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
warranty book is available, the tires should be level ground.
interchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles X Apply the electric parking brake manually
(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear (Y page 150).
requires. Do not change the direction of X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
wheel rotation. ahead position.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel P.
is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,
Z
320 Changing a wheel
X Switch off the engine. X On level ground: place chocks or other

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition suitable items under the front and rear of
lock. the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
X If included in the vehicle equipment, wheel you wish to change.
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Wheels and tires
Raising the vehicle

G WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, If you do not position the jack correctly at the
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
(Y page 280). jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
The folding wheel chock is an additional There is a risk of injury.
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from Only position the jack at the appropriate
rolling away, for example when changing a jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
wheel. jack must be positioned vertically, directly
X Fold both plates upwards :. under the jacking point of the vehicle.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
The following must be observed when
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into raising the vehicle:
the openings in base plate =.
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
Securing the vehicle on level ground

downhill slopes.

Changing a wheel 321
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the The jacking points are located just behind the
jack will not be able to achieve its load- wheel housings of the front wheels and just
bearing capacity due to the restricted in front of the wheel housings of the rear
height. wheels (arrows).
Rmake sure that the distance between the X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-
underside of the tires and the ground does changing tool kit and place it on the
not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm). hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
AUF are visible.
Wheels and tires

raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
the wheel you wish to change by about one beneath the jacking point.
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
Z
322 Changing a wheel
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
completely on jacking point ; and the the wheel securely against the wheel hub
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X Remove the wheel. surfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
Mounting a new wheel push it on.
G WARNING X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
Wheels and tires
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged finger-tight.

wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could Lowering the vehicle
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident. G WARNING
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified and bolts are not tightened to the specified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads Have the tightening torque immediately
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.

Wheel and tire combinations 323
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon load, tire dimension variations could cause
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are the tires to come into contact with the
visible. bodywork and axle components. This could
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
once again standing firmly on the ground. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
X Place the jack to one side. damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a tested and approved.
crosswise pattern in the sequence
Information on tires, wheels and approved
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
combinations can be obtained from any
must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
tools in the vehicle again. previous damage cannot always be
X Check the tire pressure of the newly detected on retreaded tires. As a result,
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
Observe the recommended tire pressure safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do
(Y page 301). not mount used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
Wheels and tires

Overview of abbreviations used in the
Wheel and tire combinations following tire tables:
General notes RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
RRA: rear axle
recommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by The recommended pressures for various
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your operating conditions can be found:
vehicle. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
These tires have been specially adapted for with the recommended tire pressures on
use with the control systems, such as ABS the B-pillar on the driver's side
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original the fuel filler flap
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended Observe the notes on recommended tire
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics) pressures under various operating conditions
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only (Y page 301).
certain AMG tires) Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires the tires are cold. Comply with the
may only be used on wheels that have been maintenance recommendations of the tire
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
Z
324 Wheel and tire combinations
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always

equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 281).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
Wheels and tires
workshop.
i The following pages contain information
on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
Winter tires are not available at the factory
as standard equipment or optional extras.
If you want to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, it may be necessary
to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
size. The size of the approved winter tires
may differ from the standard tires. This is
dependent on the model and the
equipment installed at the factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
In the following table, the wheel/tire
combinations are assigned to the vehicle
models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
V1 B 2507
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are

available at the factory for all countries.
7 BlueEFFICIENCY

Emergency spare wheel 325
Tires
Summer tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/40 R18 92 W XL MOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 18 H2 #
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SMOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 17 H2 #
Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)
Winter tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si 6.5 J x 17 H2 #
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL 6.5 J x 17 H2 #
M+SiMOExtended9 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
Wheels and tires

Emergency spare wheel Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or
G WARNING
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel (80 km/h).
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Snow chains must not be mounted on
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
emergency spare wheels.
severely impair the driving characteristics.
To avoid hazardous situations: General notes
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
You should regularly check the pressure of
drive carefully.
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
to long trips, and correct the pressure as
emergency spare wheel that differs in size. necessary (Y page 301). The value on the
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel or as given in the "Technical data"
wheel of a different size briefly. section (Y page 323) is valid.
Rdo not switch ESP® off. i When you are driving with the emergency
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
wheel of a different size replaced at the loss warning system cannot function
nearest qualified specialist workshop. reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
8 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
9 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with activated tire pressure loss
warning.
Z
326 Emergency spare wheel
warning system when the defective wheel

has been replaced with a new wheel.
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheel

Wheels and tires

X Loosen lashing straps ; on emergency
spare wheel bag :.
X Remove emergency spare wheel bag :
with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
For further information on changing and
mounting a wheel, see (Y page 319).
Technical data
"Minispare"
emergency spare
wheel
Tires Steel wheel
T 125/80 R17 99 M 3.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa ET 19.5
(4.2 bar/61 psi)

327

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 328
Warranty ............................................ 328
Identification plates ......................... 328
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 329
Vehicle data ...................................... 335
Technical data

328 Identification plates
Useful information Accessories warranties. You can obtain

information about this from any authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all Mercedes-Benz Center.
models and all standard and optional i Should you lose your Service and
equipment of your vehicle available at the Warranty Information booklet, have an
time of publication of the Operator's authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange
Manual. Country-specific differences are for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
described. This also applies to safety- Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
i Read the information on qualified vehicle identification number (VIN)
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data
Warranty X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
The Service and Warranty Information
booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your vehicle.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
Example: vehicle identification plate
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, ; VIN
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, = Paint code
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty i The data shown on the vehicle
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon identification plate is used only as an
Laws) example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
Replacement parts and accessories are
shown here. You can find the data
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and

Service products and filling capacities 329
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle Service products and filling

identification plate. capacities
VIN
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
X
Dispose of service products in an
Slide the right-hand front seat to its
environmentally responsible manner.
rearmost position.
X Fold up floor covering : in front of the Service products include the following:
right-hand front seat. RFuels
You will see VIN ;.
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
The VIN can also be found in the following RCoolant
Technical data
locations:
RBrake fluid
Ron the lower edge of the windshield RWindshield washer fluid
(Y page 329)
RClimate control system refrigerant
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 328) Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use
products that have been tested and approved
Engine number by Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved
products can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations

indicate a level of quality or a specification in
: Emissions control information plate
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
; Engine number (stamped into the MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
crankcase) approved by Mercedes-Benz.
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Z
330 Service products and filling capacities
Fuel Model Of which

reserve
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Approx.
G WARNING 1.6 US gal
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (6.0 l)
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Gasoline
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Fuel grade
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
refueling. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
G WARNING wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
There is a risk of injury. wrong fuel could result in damage to the
You must make sure that fuel does not come fuel system and the engine. The repair
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. lines drained completely.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! You should only refuel with unleaded
observe the following: premium-grade gasoline as this avoids
RWash away fuel from skin immediately damaging the catalytic converter.
Technical data
using soap and water. If engine running problems are apparent,

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, have the cause checked immediately and
immediately rinse them thoroughly with repaired. Excess unburned fuel can
clean water. Seek medical assistance otherwise enter the catalytic converter,
without delay. leading to overheating and possibly
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical causing a fire.
assistance without delay. Do not induce ! To ensure the longevity and full
vomiting. performance of the engine, only premium-
RImmediately change out of clothing which grade unleaded gasoline may be used.
has come into contact with fuel. If there is no premium-grade unleaded
gasoline available and regular unleaded
Tank capacity gasoline must be used, please observe the
following precautions:
Model Total Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
capacity
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 13.2 US gal with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
(50.0 l) as soon as possible.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration.

Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g. contamination of the entire fuel system.
two passengers without luggage, do not The repair costs are high. This does not
allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm. include additives for the removal and
Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
operated in mountainous terrain, do not must only be mixed with additives
depress the accelerator pedal further recommended by Mercedes-Benz. More
than Ô of the pedal travel. information about recommended additives
can be obtained from any authorized
Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded Mercedes-Benz Center.
gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.
One of the main problems of poor fuel quality
Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or
is the forming of deposits that are created
unleaded gasoline with additives can be used.
during the gasoline combustion process.
The concentration of additives in the fuel,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:
branded fuels that have additives.
REthanol
If you use fuels without these additives over
RTAME a longer period of time, carbon deposits may
RETBE build up. These deposits form at the inlet
RIPA valves and in the combustion chamber in
RTBA particular.
For MTBE, the concentration should not This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:
exceed 15%. Rlonger engine warm-up phase
The concentration of methanol in gasoline, Runeven idle
Technical data
including other additives, must not exceed Rengine noise
3%. Rmisfiring
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not Rloss of power
permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol
Carbon deposits may form if the availability
and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.
of gasoline with relevant additives is
All of these blends must fulfill the fuel insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,
requirements, e.g.: Mercedes-Benz recommends additives
Rknock resistance approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;
Rboiling point see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Rvapor pressure For a list of approved products, consult an
You will usually find information about the fuel authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the with the instructions for use on the product
label on the pump, ask the staff for label.
assistance. Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This
causes unnecessary costs and could damage
i For more information, contact a qualified the engine.
Information on refueling (Y page 147).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
can increase wear and tear to the fuel
system high-pressure pump and lead to
Z
Engine oil Additives
General notes ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to Engine oil viscosity
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. You could
otherwise cause engine damage or damage
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the
important safety notes on service products Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
(Y page 329). of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
The engine oils are matched to the this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and means that it is thin.
service intervals. You should therefore only Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
use engine oils and oil filters that are (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
Technical data
approved for vehicles with maintenance temperatures. The table shows you which
systems. SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, temperature characteristics of engine oils
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
Center. Or visit the website of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. strongly recommended that you carry out
The table shows which engine oils have been regular oil changes using an approved engine
approved for your vehicle. oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Model Engine MB
model Approval Brake fluid
B 250 270 229.5 G WARNING
BlueEFFICIENCY
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
i MB approval is indicated on the oil the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
containers. fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
Filling capacities hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter. You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Model Capacity
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

When handling brake fluid, observe the When handling coolant, observe the
important safety notes on service products important safety notes on service products
(Y page 329). (Y page 329).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found The coolant is a mixture of water and
in the Maintenance Booklet. antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- the following tasks:
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Rcorrosion protection
Information about approved brake fluid can Rantifreeze protection
be obtained at any qualified specialist Rraising the boiling point
workshop or on the Internet at
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at coolant during operation is approximately
a qualified specialist workshop. 266 ‡ (130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
Coolant should:
Important safety notes Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
G WARNING approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
components in the engine compartment, it down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. will not be dissipated as effectively.
Technical data
Let the engine cool down before you add If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly inhibitor.
clean the antifreeze from components before
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
starting the engine.
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
! Only add coolant that has been premixed accordance with MB Specifications for
with the desired antifreeze protection. You Service Products 310.1.
could otherwise damage the engine. The coolant is checked with every
Further information on coolants can be maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications workshop.
for Service Products, MB Specifications for i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
Internet at adequate antifreeze and corrosion
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or protection.
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, Filling capacities
even in countries where high temperatures
Model Capacity
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not B 250 Approx. 8.2 US qt
sufficiently protected from corrosion and BlueEFFICIENCY (7.8 l)
overheating.
Z
i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor At temperatures below freezing:

according to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0. X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
Windshield washer system and
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
headlamp cleaning system
temperature.
Important safety notes RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
G WARNING WinterFit with 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot WinterFit with 1 part water.
engine components or the exhaust system it RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. WinterFit with 1 part water.
Make sure that no windshield washer i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid Climate control system refrigerant
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps. Important safety notes
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to Type of refrigerant
Technical data
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the

The instruction label about types of
level sensor may be damaged.
refrigerants can be found on the radiator
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit cross member.
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become Refrigerant R-134a
blocked.
! Only use refrigerant R-134a and PAG oil
When handling washer fluid, observe the (part number A0019890803) which has
important safety notes on service products been approved by Mercedes-Benz. The
(Y page 329). approved R-134a PAG oil may not be mixed
At temperatures above freezing: with other conventional PAG oils.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture Otherwise, the climate control system may
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. be damaged.
MB SummerFit. Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Vehicle data 335
Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol Dimensions and weights
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable SAE standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible dangers
Rthat it is necessary to have maintenance
Technical data
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop
Filling capacities Model : ;

Maximum Opening
All models Capacity headroom height
Refrigerant 650 ± 10 g B 250 73.8 in 78.0 in
(22.9 ± 0.4 oz) BlueEFFICIEN (1874 mm) (1981 mm)
CY
PAG oil 120 g
(4.2 oz)
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle length 171.6 in
(4359 mm)
Vehicle width 79.1 in
including exterior (2010 mm)
mirrors
Vehicle height 61.3 in
(1558 mm)
Wheelbase 106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Z
336 Vehicle data
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
Turning radius 36.1 ft
(11.0 m)
Maximum roof 165 lb
load (75.0 kg)
Technical data

Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz

vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or

suggestions you may have regarding this
Operator's Manual to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,

without written permission from Daimler AG.
As at 25.05.2012

É2465840000bËÍ
2465840000
Order no. 6515 1729 13 Part no. 246 584 00 00 Edition D 2013
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only


Bclass

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bclass

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-Class

Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety ................................................... 37

Opening and closing ........................... 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97

Climate control ................................. 117

Driving and parking .......................... 133

On-board computer and displays .... 185

Stowage and features ...................... 235

Maintenance and care ...................... 265

Breakdown assistance ..................... 279

Wheels and tires ............................... 297

Technical data ................................... 327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the center air vents ........... 130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic transmission Blind Spot Assist

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power washer ................................ 272 Tail lamps ...................................... 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching the rear window Cup holder

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Distance recorder ............................. 189 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281 G

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Important safety notes .................. 266 L

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching the surround lighting Roadside Assistance button .......... 254

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

N Panorama roof with power tilt/

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

(vehicles without the EASY- Setting the airflow ............................ 126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SRS (Supplemental Restraint T

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Temperature Increased vehicle weight due to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 318 V

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 53 Wiper blades

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You can influence both factors. You should

Ralways have service work carried out at a Rdoor sills

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Have aftermarket accessories installed at Vehicle equipment

Maintenance If you have purchased a used car, please send

Roadside Assistance If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating safety In situations like this, the body, the

G WARNING Declarations of conformity

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the

1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE